IntroductionWelcome| 00:04 | Hi! My name is Mike Rankin and
welcome to InDesign CS6: Interactive Documents.
| | 00:09 | In this course I'll demonstrate
how to use InDesign CS6 to create
| | 00:13 | interactivity and documents destined for PDF
output as well as Adobe's Digital Publishing Suite.
| | 00:18 | I'll cover how to enrich PDF documents
with audio and video, how to add buttons
| | 00:23 | to play slideshows and control the
visibility of content, as well as how to
| | 00:27 | create animations and include them in your PDFs.
| | 00:30 | I'll also show you how to use the
Adobe Digital Publishing Suite tools to add
| | 00:34 | interactive overlays on top of your
InDesign layouts for tablet publishing.
| | 00:38 | These documents can include
everything from hyperlinks, web content, and
| | 00:42 | scrollable frames, to visually
engaging elements like image sequences 360-
| | 00:47 | degree panoramas, and
photos you can pan and zoom.
| | 00:50 | I'll also show the new features in
CS6 that can be useful for adapting your
| | 00:54 | pages to fit multiple devices.
| | 00:56 | So join me now as we explore creating
interactive documents with InDesign CS6.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the exercise files and scripts| 00:01 | If you're a Premium member of the
lynda.com online training library or if you're
| | 00:05 | watching this on a DVD, you will
have access to the exercise files I used
| | 00:09 | throughout this video series.
| | 00:10 | I suggest that after you download
the files or copy them from the DVD,
| | 00:14 | that you place them on
your desktop for easy access.
| | 00:17 | There's one main Exercise File folder,
and within that folder you'll find a
| | 00:21 | folder for each chapter, plus a folder of links.
| | 00:24 | Inside each chapter folder you'll find
folders for each lesson and then within
| | 00:28 | that, you'll find the
InDesign file used in that lesson.
| | 00:33 | If you're a Monthly subscriber, you
won't have access to the exercise files,
| | 00:36 | but you can still follow along, by
repeating the steps shown in the movies,
| | 00:39 | using your own files.
| | 00:41 | Now let's get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Exploring Trends in Digital DesignCase study: tomaxxi's InDesign shortcuts guide| 00:01 | A terrific example of what you can
create with InDesign's interactive features
| | 00:04 | is Marijan Tompa's interactive
shortcuts guide for InDesign CS5.
| | 00:09 | You can find it at his web site tomaxxi.com.
| | 00:12 | This is a comprehensive guide to all
of the keyboard shortcuts for InDesign,
| | 00:15 | for both Mac and PC, packaged in
an attractive and really fun-to-use,
| | 00:19 | interactive experience.
| | 00:21 | If you like using InDesign, you may
start exploring here and find yourself
| | 00:24 | wanting to keep going and learning
more and more, because it's so easy to use
| | 00:28 | and so well designed.
| | 00:29 | The guide is in the form of an animated
keyboard that reveals all of InDesign's
| | 00:33 | keyboard shortcuts as
you interact with each key.
| | 00:36 | So as you roll over a key, you see a
pop-up describing the most-used functions
| | 00:40 | associated with that key, and when you
roll off, the pop-up disappears. When you
| | 00:44 | click on a key, you see all the
shortcuts that used that key displayed in the
| | 00:47 | table, and you can close
this table by clicking the X.
| | 00:51 | For some keys, there's more information
than can fit on one window, so there are
| | 00:55 | buttons in the bottom and
right to go to the next page.
| | 00:58 | So, for example, Up has two pages. I can
go to page 2 or back to page 1, and close it.
| | 01:04 | There are also buttons to email
Marijan, to follow him on Twitter, to learn
| | 01:10 | about where he lives, and to go to his web site.
| | 01:12 | There is also an About page
and even a Quick Start Guide.
| | 01:18 | Now what we're looking at here is a
SWF file that was exported from InDesign.
| | 01:22 | It's also available as a stand-alone
AIR application you can download and run
| | 01:26 | from your computer. But the key point
is that no other program was used to
| | 01:29 | create the interactivity in the SWF
file--no Photoshop, no Illustrator, no
| | 01:33 | Flash--just pure InDesign, and Marijan
was kind enough to share his original
| | 01:38 | InDesign file with me.
| | 01:39 | We'll switch over to InDesign and
take a look at that, and when I poke
| | 01:43 | around inside the file,
| | 01:44 | I can see just how he
accomplished all that slick interactivity.
| | 01:47 | You can see right away there is a lot
of elements here, but let's just take one
| | 01:50 | and see how it works.
| | 01:51 | So, if I select the T key and I go over
to my Buttons and Forms panel, I can see
| | 01:55 | that this is a button with the name T
and the event On Release or Tap has two
| | 02:00 | actions. The first one is Go To State of
a multi-state object called myShortcuts
| | 02:06 | and go to State T. So if I select that
multi-state object and go to my Object
| | 02:11 | States panel, I can see that there are
states for every single key, and this is
| | 02:15 | what provides us those pop-up menus.
| | 02:17 | So I'll scroll all the way down till I
find T and show that state, and there we
| | 02:21 | can see the key explanation.
| | 02:23 | I'll scroll back up and go to the
blank state, and we'll go back to the
| | 02:27 | Buttons and Forms panel.
| | 02:30 | So there's another action also, which
is Show/Hide Buttons and Forms, and this
| | 02:34 | will just show the myClose button,
which is this one right here.
| | 02:40 | The myClose button will go to the
blank state of the multi-state object,
| | 02:44 | basically resetting the
keyboard to its original appearance.
| | 02:48 | The T key also has more events. So on
rollover, it will play an animation,
| | 02:54 | the T_info Animation, and it will
reverse it on rolloff, and this object right
| | 02:58 | above is what's animated. You can see
the motion path coming down and I'll go to
| | 03:03 | the Animation panel, T_info,
Fly in from Top, On Roll Over.
| | 03:08 | We can see the animation takes half a
second. It's going to animate to its
| | 03:12 | current location, it's going to fade in,
and it's hidden until the animation starts.
| | 03:18 | All in all, it's a very well-
thought-out and well-executed plan.
| | 03:21 | Marijan described the
workflow he used on his web site.
| | 03:24 | He started by collecting all the
information for his guide, all the keyboard
| | 03:27 | shortcuts for both Mac and PC, and
then he designed the layout and the
| | 03:30 | appearance of all the keys and pop-ups.
| | 03:32 | Then he created object styles to apply
to each of the keys for three states--
| | 03:36 | Normal, Over, and Click--and then he
input all the shortcut information into
| | 03:40 | tables and used a script to merge
those pages into multi-state objects.
| | 03:44 | Then he assigned every key to a multi-
state object state and finally exported
| | 03:48 | the whole thing to SWF. Now you might be wondering if there's
some kind of trickery here because a
| | 03:52 | script was used, but the script just
help speed things up, because there were so
| | 03:56 | much content to deal with and
Marijan happens to be an expert scripter.
| | 04:00 | So it just made sense for him to do it
that way to save time and effort, but you
| | 04:03 | could still do everything to make a
project like this without the aid of a
| | 04:06 | script; it would just take longer.
| | 04:08 | In any case, it's a truly
impressive piece of work.
| | 04:11 | Tomoxxi's interactive shortcuts
guide is a terrific example of how much
| | 04:14 | interactivity you can pack into
a document created with InDesign.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Case study: The Magic of Reality app| 00:01 | It's becoming increasingly common for
richly designed book-like apps to have
| | 00:04 | several kinds of interactivity,
including animation, audio and video, and even
| | 00:09 | the use of iPad features like
its camera, GPS, and accelerometer.
| | 00:13 | To see some examples, let's take a
tour of a very successful book app called
| | 00:17 | The Magic of Reality.
| | 00:19 | The Magic of Reality app is an
extension of a book by the same name by noted
| | 00:23 | scientist and author Richard Dawkins.
| | 00:25 | All the text to the print book is in the
app and it's enhanced by illustrations,
| | 00:29 | multimedia, animations, and interactivity.
| | 00:32 | This is a science book aimed at young
audience with the goal of introducing
| | 00:36 | readers to the awe-aspiring facts of science.
| | 00:38 | The book is composed of 12 chapters,
and each one is devoted to answering a
| | 00:42 | question, like, What are things made of,
Why do we have day and night, What is
| | 00:46 | the sun, What's a rainbow, and so on?
| | 00:48 | Now the first thing you notice about
the book is that it's set up as a single-
| | 00:51 | orientation landscape.
| | 00:53 | The layout doesn't change when you tilt
or turn the iPad, so to navigate through
| | 00:57 | the book, you swipe
horizontally left and right.
| | 01:00 | When you first open the app you're
presented with an introductory video. Then
| | 01:07 | you can swipe to go to the first page.
Then to skip to another chapter or to
| | 01:11 | a specific page, you swipe down with two
fingers. This reveals the navigation system.
| | 01:17 | The top row represents the chapters in
the book. The row beneath it revels pages
| | 01:21 | within the currently select chapter.
| | 01:23 | If I tap a chapter, its pages come into view.
| | 01:27 | If I swipe the top row, I can
scroll through the chapters.
| | 01:30 | Let's check out Chapter 9, Are We alone?
| | 01:32 | First we'll tap the chapter, and then
we'll tap the first page of the chapter.
| | 01:36 | Now that I am in Chapter 9, I'll swipe
to move through the pages and as I do,
| | 01:42 | you can see some of the animations
which loop, so they play continuously, and
| | 01:45 | they tend to be fairly subtle, to
not distract too much from the text.
| | 01:49 | As I swipe to the next page, an
alien comes into view and blinks at me.
| | 01:53 | Notice as I swipe again, he moves in
the same direction as the text, but not
| | 01:57 | quite as far as the text, so he stays partly
visible while I read these next few paragraphs.
| | 02:03 | Then when I swipe to the
next page, more aliens pop up.
| | 02:06 | I'll swipe down with two fingers to
reveal the navigation again and tap to
| | 02:11 | jump to another page.
| | 02:13 | This page was designed so the
graphic stays in view while I swipe through
| | 02:17 | several paragraphs of text/ And at
the end of the section, I come to some
| | 02:22 | interactive content.
I can tap to play some audio.
| | 02:26 | (Male speaker: In our galaxy the great majority
or stars where we have looked for planets)
| | 02:30 | (Male speaker: have turned out to possess them.
So, assuming our galaxy is typical..)
| | 02:35 | I can tap to pause it, and I can drag
the slider at the bottom of the screen to
| | 02:40 | zoom in and out on our sun.
| | 02:43 | I can zoom way out past the edge of the
Milky Way and on into the unknown and
| | 02:47 | when I'm done, I can tap the X to close
this and then swipe to move to the next page.
| | 02:53 | There are several such interactive
demos and games that go along with the
| | 02:56 | content of each chapter.
| | 02:58 | The Magic of Reality is a really
rich book app in terms of interactivity,
| | 03:01 | and some of the specific features are
beyond what you can presently do with InDesign;
| | 03:05 | however, at its core, this is a book
with a well-designed layout, a navigation
| | 03:10 | system, plus audio and video,
animations, and other elements that you control
| | 03:15 | by tapping or swiping,
| | 03:16 | and all those are things that
you can build with InDesign.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring PDF digital magazines: InDesign Magazine| 00:01 | This case study is one that's near and
dear to my heart, since I'm currently the
| | 00:04 | editor in chief of the
publication I'm about to show.
| | 00:07 | It's called InDesign Magazine, and it's a
bimonthly publication devoted solely to Adobe InDesign.
| | 00:12 | So let's take a look at a recent issue.
| | 00:14 | InDesign Magazine is published in PDF,
and right now I'm viewing it in Acrobat.
| | 00:18 | I can use the standard Acrobat tools
to navigate through the pages, and on the
| | 00:23 | editor's page, I have a greeting to the
readers which mentions all the articles
| | 00:26 | and contains hyperlinks to jump each article.
| | 00:30 | I also have links over on the left
for people to email me with feedback.
| | 00:34 | Clicking my email address will
open your default email client and
| | 00:37 | create a new email addressed to me
with the subject line of the issue number.
| | 00:42 | I also have links to the
magazine's Facebook and Twitter pages.
| | 00:45 | At the bottom of every page
there's a toolbar over here on the right.
| | 00:49 | At the left end of the toolbar there
is a button for jumping to the table of
| | 00:53 | contents, and each item in the
TOC is hyperlinked to the article.
| | 00:56 | So I can click on the article
about Liquid Layout and jump to it.
| | 01:01 | Also in the toolbar are buttons to
move ahead and back one page at a time,
| | 01:06 | clicking Previous or Next.
| | 01:10 | I can also use a toolbar button to view
the document in Full Screen mode. And in
| | 01:17 | fact, if I found the toolbar self
distracting, I can click on the button on the
| | 01:21 | far right to hide it.
| | 01:22 | Then I can click on the plus
again to show the toolbar and get out
| | 01:27 | of Full Screen mode.
| | 01:28 | And notice that each of the toolbar
buttons also changes its appearance when I
| | 01:32 | move my cursor over it.
| | 01:34 | The magazine also includes interactivity
in the form of interactive ads, so if I
| | 01:38 | go to page 6, I see this ad for
InDesign User Groups, where I can click to
| | 01:43 | select a continent and then click a
city to view the chapter information.
| | 01:49 | There is also embedded video in this issue.
| | 01:52 | I'll go to the table of content and
jump to the article on Alternate Layouts.
| | 01:57 | And if I go to page 39, there is a video up
here. I click on the sidebar; it plays a video.
| | 02:06 | (Female speaker: I've already laid the groundwork for
creating my alternate layout, by going all the way
| | 02:10 | (Female speaker: through my document and
applying Liquid Layout Rules. My paragraph style...)
| | 02:15 | And I can close it.
| | 02:16 | So in this issue of InDesign Magazine
we have examples of hyperlinks, both to
| | 02:21 | content within the document as well
as to web sites and downloads. There is
| | 02:24 | embedded video, navigation tools, and
interactivity courtesy of Flash files that
| | 02:29 | have been placed inside the PDF.
| | 02:31 | Overall, I think it is a very
functional document with unobtrusive interactive
| | 02:34 | features that support the content,
rather than act as just decorations.
| | 02:38 | You can certainly do even more with PDFs
that you export from InDesign, as we'll
| | 02:42 | see later in this video series.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Looking at digital newspapers: BostonGlobe.com| 00:01 | Newspapers, like books and magazines,
have responded to the new opportunities for
| | 00:05 | tablet publishing, but unlike books and
magazines, newspapers have a tremendous
| | 00:09 | challenge to provide a large
amount of new content every day.
| | 00:12 | As a result, sometimes a tablet
edition of a newspaper contains links to
| | 00:16 | interactivity rather than
having it embedded in the issue.
| | 00:20 | Let's take a look at one newspaper
whose tablet epaper app fits this
| | 00:23 | description, The Boston Globe.
| | 00:26 | The Boston Globe runs a web site
called boston.com that features some of the
| | 00:30 | newspaper content, but in order to
get the complete digital edition of the
| | 00:34 | newspaper, which they call the epaper,
you have to have a paid subscription.
| | 00:38 | When you do subscribe and download the
app, it appears in the iPad Newsstand,
| | 00:41 | along with the other periodicals.
| | 00:43 | I can tap it to go to my Library view,
where I see the issues I've downloaded
| | 00:48 | and the ones that are
available for me to download.
| | 00:51 | I can tap on an issue to view it.
And there are two different views to choose
| | 00:56 | from: Page view and SmartFlow.
| | 01:01 | This is Page view. I can swipe up and
down to view this page and I can swipe
| | 01:08 | left and right to view other pages.
| | 01:14 | I can also pinch and zoom or double
tap to move in and out on content.
| | 01:20 | At the top-right there are buttons for
switching between single page and spread views.
| | 01:25 | At the bottom there's a navigation bar
where I can tap to skip to another section.
| | 01:30 | So if I wanted to see world news, I
can tap the world and go to that section.
| | 01:34 | Thumbnails of those pages come into
view, and I can tap one to go there.
| | 01:39 | I can also navigate quickly by
tapping the left and right arrows on either
| | 01:43 | side of the bar. So if I wanted to
read the comics section, I can hold the
| | 01:47 | arrow down on the right side and
scroll quickly to the last section and then
| | 01:51 | tap to read the comics.
| | 01:53 | It's too bad the crossword and puzzles
aren't interactive. Maybe some future
| | 01:56 | version will add this.
| | 01:59 | Some articles contain hyperlinks.
| | 02:01 | If I navigate to an article that was
continued in the print edition from
| | 02:04 | one page to another,
| | 02:06 | I can click the continued page number
to jump to it, and from that point I can
| | 02:10 | click the Continued From button to go
back to the page where the article begins.
| | 02:15 | I'll navigate to the Sports section
by tapping it in the bar at the bottom.
| | 02:19 | Notice how most of the article titles
are highlighted in blue? That's a shortcut
| | 02:22 | to read the article in SmartFlow.
| | 02:24 | So I'll tap one of the blue
highlighted titles, and the page flips over to
| | 02:28 | SmartFlow, and I can swipe to view
the content in a simpler format.
| | 02:32 | Notice at the end of the articles
there are these green arrows. If I tap one,
| | 02:36 | that opens a pop-up with several choices.
| | 02:38 | I can switch back to Page view,
print the article, copy it, listen to the
| | 02:43 | article be read aloud,
| | 02:44 | I can express my opinion by voting
thumbs up or thumbs down, and I can share the
| | 02:49 | article via social media. Let's tap Share.
| | 02:53 | Notice that when I'm in
SmartFlow, in the top-right I also have
| | 02:56 | formatting controls.
| | 02:57 | I can make the font size bigger or
smaller and change the font just like I
| | 03:01 | could with an ebook.
| | 03:03 | So which of these things
could you do with InDesign?
| | 03:05 | Well, you can create hyperlinks
between pieces of content, you can create
| | 03:09 | pop-ups with links to social media as
well as buttons to print content and to
| | 03:13 | play audio; but you currently can't do
things like resize the text, unless it is
| | 03:17 | just a picture of text.
| | 03:19 | Overall, there's usually not much in
terms of which media in the epaper edition
| | 03:23 | of The Boston Globe.
| | 03:24 | We don't see the slideshows or
videos that are common on boston.com.
| | 03:29 | In fact, the main feature of this
app is to give access to the content of
| | 03:32 | the newspaper and separate that from
the free content on the web site, that
| | 03:36 | when there is an article that
mentions rich media like audio or video, it's
| | 03:40 | hyperlinked to the web site, which
opens in a separate viewer to see that content.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Reviewing digital magazines: National Geographic| 00:01 | One of the most popular and
successful magazines that uses Adobe's Digital
| | 00:04 | Publishing Suite is National Geographic.
| | 00:07 | It won the Best Tablet Magazine Award in the
2012 National Magazine Awards for Digital Media.
| | 00:13 | Let's take a tour of the
interactivity that makes National Geographic's
| | 00:17 | tablet edition so special.
| | 00:19 | To view my issues of National Geographic,
I'll go to my Newsstand, I'll tap the
| | 00:24 | National Geographic app on the
shelf, and I come to my library.
| | 00:29 | This is where I can see all the
issues available for me to download.
| | 00:32 | I've already downloaded some issues
and for those, I have buttons to view the
| | 00:36 | issue or to archive the issue, which
removes it from my device. An archived
| | 00:41 | issue can be downloaded again at any time.
| | 00:44 | Let's take a look at the issue
devoted to the 100th anniversary of the
| | 00:47 | sinking of the Titanic.
| | 00:48 | I'll tap View and the first thing I see
is a 360-degree rendering of the wreck,
| | 00:56 | the Titanic, as it is now.
| | 00:59 | And when the animation is done,
the rest of the cover fades in.
| | 01:03 | I can swipe horizontally to go to the
table of contents, and if I wanted to see
| | 01:07 | that 360-degree animation, I can swipe back again.
| | 01:10 | So that animation plays
whenever the page is loaded.
| | 01:16 | If I tap, I get navigation controls
at the top and bottom of the screen.
| | 01:20 | I can tap at the top-left to view a
scrolling list of articles in the issue,
| | 01:24 | along with thumbnails of each.
| | 01:26 | If I tap an article, I jump to it.
| | 01:29 | Here I can read the Editor's Note and
there's a button to send the editor an email.
| | 01:34 | I can also tap the star at the top-
right to add an article to my favorites.
| | 01:39 | On the far right, I can tap to view all the
articles in a horizontally scrolling view.
| | 01:43 | As I swipe, when a different article
comes into the center of the view, its
| | 01:47 | description appears at the top,
and I can tap any page to go to it.
| | 01:52 | I'll tap on the first page of the
Visions section of the magazine, and when I'm
| | 01:57 | viewing this photo, I can tap a small
button to reveal the photo's caption, and
| | 02:01 | tap again to hide the caption.
| | 02:03 | This is a very clever use of buttons
that allows National Geographic to have the
| | 02:07 | photo take up the whole screen and
not have to leave space for the caption.
| | 02:11 | I'll tap again to look at one more
navigation feature, and that's at the
| | 02:14 | bottom of the page where I can
drag a slider to reveal thumbnails and
| | 02:17 | descriptions of each page.
| | 02:18 | When I see the page I want to
go to, I can release the slider.
| | 02:23 | So here's the cover story on the
Titanic, and notice that I have social media
| | 02:27 | links integrated right on the page with
Twitter and Facebook buttons, as well as email.
| | 02:32 | On the lower-right of the page I can
see an indication that this article
| | 02:35 | scrolls vertically.
| | 02:36 | I can continue swiping down through
the content, until eventually I come to a
| | 02:41 | timeline that's been arranged
vertically inside a scrolling area. And I also
| | 02:47 | have a graphic that's to scale,
representing how far below the surface of the
| | 02:50 | water the Titanic rests.
| | 02:52 | In the timeline I can read about major
events from the sinking of the ship to
| | 02:56 | the present, and on the left there
is a button to jump to the top of the
| | 02:59 | article, so I don't have to
swipe a whole lot to get back there.
| | 03:02 | On the next page, I have a
series of four views of the wreck.
| | 03:05 | I can tap on one of them and after it
has finished loading, I can pinch and
| | 03:09 | zoom to explore the photo in detail.
| | 03:12 | And when I am finished, I can tap Done.
| | 03:16 | I can swipe to the next feature,
| | 03:18 | Dive the Titanic, which is an
interactive 3D model of the wreck.
| | 03:21 | I'll tap to launch it. And I can
swipe to view the wreck from any side.
| | 03:30 | I'll tap Done. And I can go to the
next feature, where I can slide out a map
| | 03:37 | showing the location of the wreck.
I can slide it back in, and I can tap the
| | 03:42 | circle to see a photo mosaic of the wreck site.
| | 03:46 | When it's done loading, I can zoom in and
tap a label to read about a particular item.
| | 03:56 | And in the top left, the navigator view tells
me where I am in the overall map of the wreck.
| | 04:01 | I'll tap Done and swipe to the
next feature, which is a video.
| | 04:07 | I can tap to play it, and I have
controls to rewind, fast-forward, and pause,
| | 04:18 | and a progress bar that I can slide with my
finger to scrub to a different spot in the video.
| | 04:22 | I'll tap Done and swipe to the next
feature, which is an introduction to the
| | 04:27 | photo series Ghostwalking in Titanic.
| | 04:31 | I can swipe this article vertically and
tap the top-right of the photo to make
| | 04:36 | it nearly full screen, and
then tap again to close it.
| | 04:40 | National Geographic really went
all out for the Titanic issue with several
| | 04:44 | videos, panoramas, content and scrollable
frames, photos that can be zoomed on, and more.
| | 04:50 | Later in this series, we'll see how to
create many of these types of interactive
| | 04:54 | content for publication in an Adobe DPS project.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring iamboundless.com| 00:01 | When you think of interactive documents
that come from InDesign you'd probably
| | 00:04 | think first of PDFs, then maybe
magazines and other documents made with Adobe's
| | 00:08 | Digital Publishing Suite.
| | 00:09 | But you can also create
interactive web content with InDesign.
| | 00:13 | A great example of this is the web
site iamboundless.com. It's a site for
| | 00:17 | Ryan Clayton Designs and all the
interactivity here was created with
| | 00:21 | InDesign, so let's take a look.
| | 00:23 | I have the site here in my web browser,
and if I mouse over any of the links
| | 00:27 | down at the bottom, I can see the
appearance change. I'll click on About This
| | 00:31 | Page and I get the artist's statement and
he tells me right here that everything
| | 00:36 | here was made with 100% InDesign.
| | 00:38 | He has the social media links.
| | 00:40 | I can click to close it
and look at the portfolio.
| | 00:44 | A portfolio is an interactive slideshow
where I can click the arrows to navigate
| | 00:49 | back and forth and see the portfolio pieces.
| | 00:51 | And I can also mouse over the
navigation bar and click to jump to any of the
| | 00:59 | pieces from there. And when I mouse
away, the navigation bar goes away.
| | 01:03 | I can click to close and it fades out nicely.
| | 01:08 | There are also links to his resume,
which opens as a PDF, and his blog.
| | 01:14 | All right, so let's switch over to
InDesign and see how all this was made.
| | 01:20 | So here's the InDesign file, and we'll
take a look in the Layers panel. And
| | 01:25 | it's well organized into four layers:
Navigation, Contact Box, Portfolio, and Background.
| | 01:31 | So let's look at the Navigation layer.
| | 01:32 | I have these four elements down at
the bottom. I'll select About This Page,
| | 01:37 | click on my Buttons and Forms, and I
can see it's a button that will play
| | 01:41 | the animation contact.
| | 01:42 | If I select this element and look in
animation, this is the contact animation.
| | 01:48 | It's going to be apply to that group,
it'll cause it to fade in, and it will be
| | 01:53 | hidden until it's animated.
| | 01:55 | I can also drill down into that group
and select the X, go to my Buttons and
| | 02:00 | Forms, and I see that's the button
that'll also play the animation contact, but
| | 02:05 | it'll play it in reverse.
| | 02:07 | So when I click the X, the
whole contact box fades out again.
| | 02:10 | Now let's go to the Layers panel and hide the
contact box, and we'll look at the Portfolio.
| | 02:15 | We'll go again to my Buttons and Forms panel.
| | 02:18 | This is going to play an animation
called Portfolio, and it's also going to go to
| | 02:21 | the first state of a multi-state object.
| | 02:26 | I'll select this group and drill
down and look at my Object States panel.
| | 02:33 | And this is a multi-state object
where each state corresponds to one of
| | 02:36 | the portfolio pieces.
| | 02:42 | I also have these arrows, which are
buttons which will also navigate
| | 02:47 | the multi-state object.
| | 02:49 | If I look out on the side, here is that
sliding drawer of the portfolio pieces.
| | 02:54 | And I can select it.
| | 02:56 | I can see the motion path for the
animation and look in the Animation panel,
| | 03:02 | and I can see that it's going to move
left when you roll over it, and it's going
| | 03:06 | to reverse when you roll off.
| | 03:07 | So that's what causes that
nice sliding-drawer effect.
| | 03:10 | We'll check out the Resume button,
which will go to a URL that ends up with the
| | 03:18 | PDF of his resume. And My Design Blog
is also a button that goes to his blog.
| | 03:23 | All of these elements were exported to a
SWF file that was added to the web site.
| | 03:29 | Overall, this is an awesome piece of
work and a virtual tour of InDesign's
| | 03:32 | features for creating interactivity.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Setting Up InDesign for Designing Digital DocumentsSetting preferences for interactive documents | 00:00 | If you've used InDesign for any
amount of time, you know that it's a deep,
| | 00:04 | feature-rich application with all kinds
of preferences that can change the way
| | 00:07 | it behaves and displays content.
| | 00:09 | So you definitely should take a few
minutes to customize InDesign and help you
| | 00:13 | work faster and smoother.
| | 00:14 | Let's take a look at some of
InDesign's preferences you might want to change
| | 00:17 | before working on interactive documents.
| | 00:20 | In fact, before we even open the
Preferences dialog box, it's important
| | 00:23 | to understand the difference
between global preferences and document-
| | 00:27 | specific preferences.
| | 00:28 | Although they are not distinguished in
any way in the Preferences dialog box,
| | 00:32 | some of InDesign's preferences are
global, meaning they apply to every
| | 00:35 | document, whereas, others can be
set on a document-by-document basis.
| | 00:39 | So when you change a document specific-
preference with a document open, that
| | 00:43 | change only applies to the open document.
| | 00:45 | The other thing to remember is that your
document-specific settings travel with the document.
| | 00:50 | So no matter how you set your document-
specific preferences, if you open someone
| | 00:54 | else's document where those
preferences were set differently, their settings
| | 00:58 | will take effect in that document, not yours.
| | 01:01 | So for example, if all of a sudden
you're not seeing typographer's quotes being
| | 01:05 | used in a document, it's probably
because of the preferences that were saved in
| | 01:08 | that document you're working on.
| | 01:10 | So how can you tell which preferences
are global and which are document-specific?
| | 01:13 | Well, you can go to indesignsecrets.com
and check out the visual guide to
| | 01:18 | InDesign preferences that I created there.
| | 01:20 | It's a PDF file that you can download
with screenshots of each pane in the
| | 01:23 | Preferences dialog box, and the document-
specific preferences are highlighted in yellow.
| | 01:28 | So let's go back to InDesign.
| | 01:31 | And the first thing you might want to
do is get rid of this Welcome screen.
| | 01:35 | If it's not something you typically use,
you don't want to have to be closing it over and over again.
| | 01:39 | So just click Don't show again, and close it.
| | 01:43 | To open InDesign's Preferences, you
can press Command+K or Ctrl+K or you
| | 01:47 | can choose InDesign >
Preferences > General on the Mac, or Edit >
| | 01:53 | Preferences > General on the PC.
| | 01:55 | And the first thing that you notice in
the Preferences dialog box is there are
| | 01:58 | 18 different sets of preferences in InDesign.
| | 02:02 | Each one has several
different preferences within it.
| | 02:04 | Fortunately, we're not concerned with
each and every one of those right now;
| | 02:07 | we just want to consider the ones that
might especially impact your work with
| | 02:10 | interactive documents.
| | 02:12 | So with no documents open, I know that
regardless of whether a preference is
| | 02:15 | document-specific or global, the
changes I make will apply to all new
| | 02:19 | documents I create.
| | 02:21 | So, under Interface preferences,
you might want to turn off Enable
| | 02:24 | Multi-Touch Gestures here,
| | 02:26 | if you find that you don't use them or
if they're getting in your way, causing
| | 02:29 | you to inadvertently do things like zoom
and rotate images or move things out of
| | 02:32 | the way. On the other hand, gestures
like pinch and zoom are becoming kind of
| | 02:36 | commonplace now that many
people are using tablet devices.
| | 02:39 | So this really is a personal preference.
| | 02:42 | The next one, Highlight Object Under
Selection tool, is one that a lot of
| | 02:46 | people like to change so that they
don't see the frame edges every time they
| | 02:49 | mouse over an object.
| | 02:50 | This can be kind of distracting,
especially if you have lots of objects on the page.
| | 02:54 | I tend to leave it on, but
some folks like to turn it off.
| | 02:58 | Live Screen Drawing is now set
to be delayed by default in CS6,
| | 03:02 | so you won't see a full rendering of
objects as you move them, unless you pause
| | 03:06 | for a moment before you start to move them.
| | 03:08 | If you'd rather see them always fully
rendered, switch this from Delayed to
| | 03:11 | Immediate. I am going to
leave it back on Delayed.
| | 03:14 | And also new in CS6 we have the option
to Greek Vector Graphics on Drag, which
| | 03:18 | is the same thing as the
Delayed Live Screen Drawing.
| | 03:22 | Under Type, it's most likely that
you're going to want to apply leading to
| | 03:26 | entire paragraphs, so I always
change this preference to selected.
| | 03:30 | Otherwise, you can have different
leading values for each line of text.
| | 03:33 | If you know that you're going to have
some situations where you'd want this,
| | 03:36 | then leave the setting alone, but
again, most people would typically want
| | 03:39 | consistent leading
throughout an entire paragraph.
| | 03:42 | Under Units & Increments, if you're
going to be primarily creating documents for
| | 03:45 | the screen instead of print, you
might think you'd want to change your Ruler
| | 03:49 | Units from Picas to something like Pixels.
| | 03:52 | But that's not really necessary.
| | 03:55 | When you create a new document you'll
always have to choose an intent, either
| | 03:58 | print, web, or digital publishing.
| | 04:00 | And if you choose web or digital
publishing, your Ruler Units will automatically
| | 04:04 | be switched to Pixels.
| | 04:05 | Under Display Performance, you might want
to set your Default View to High Quality.
| | 04:11 | If you have a fast computer and you
generally like to see things like placed
| | 04:14 | graphics and transparency at full
quality instead of using low-res previews,
| | 04:18 | definitely use High Quality.
| | 04:20 | Also you might want to turn off Type Greeking.
| | 04:22 | I always set it to zero.
| | 04:24 | That way I can always see my type,
no matter how far I am zoomed out.
| | 04:28 | Under File Handling, you can set the
number of pages to be rendered as preview
| | 04:32 | images within a document.
| | 04:34 | By default it's the first 2 pages at
medium resolution, but you can choose to
| | 04:38 | include all pages if you want to, and you can
include really large previews if you want to.
| | 04:43 | Again, the trade-off is file size.
| | 04:45 | The more you include in the document,
the larger the file size will get.
| | 04:49 | That's it for the Preferences dialog box,
so I'll click OK to save my changes.
| | 04:54 | And there are also preferences you
can set outside the dialog box to
| | 04:57 | increase your efficiency.
| | 04:58 | One on the Macintosh is the application frame.
| | 05:01 | This puts the whole InDesign user
interface, including every document window and
| | 05:05 | every panel, including the
control panel, into one window.
| | 05:09 | And this is useful because it keeps
everything handy, it makes it simple to move
| | 05:12 | everything around all at once, and
it blocks out distractions from other
| | 05:16 | applications you might be running.
| | 05:18 | So to turn on the application frame, I
go to Window > Application Frame.
| | 05:22 | Now you can see everything is
grouped in this one window.
| | 05:26 | I'll click on the green button to
expand it, and it fills up my whole screen.
| | 05:31 | Another example of a preference you
might want to change is in the Pages panel.
| | 05:36 | If you display pages horizontally or by
alternate layout, you can have much less
| | 05:40 | wasted screen space than if you display
them vertically, which is the default.
| | 05:44 | You can choose how pages are displayed
just by right-clicking in the Pages panel
| | 05:48 | and choose View Pages: Horizontally,
Vertically, or By Alternate Layout. I am
| | 05:52 | going to select Horizontally as my default.
| | 05:55 | Note that the preference for viewing
pages is a global setting, so it doesn't
| | 05:59 | matter if you have a document open
or not; whatever you choose here will
| | 06:01 | apply to all documents.
| | 06:03 | Also, in the View Extras menu, you can
choose whether to show or hide things like
| | 06:08 | Link Badges, the Content Grabber, Live
Corners, and the Anchored Object Control.
| | 06:13 | These are all meant to give you added
convenience and efficiency in working,
| | 06:16 | but if you find them distracting, it's
nice to know that you can customize your
| | 06:19 | view however you want.
| | 06:21 | Getting your preferences set up right and
understanding which ones are global and
| | 06:24 | which ones are document-specific is
one of the keys to a smooth workflow so
| | 06:28 | you and InDesign can work together in sync.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Customizing the workspace | 00:01 | InDesign CS6 has nearly 60
panels in its user interface.
| | 00:05 | With so many tools at your disposal,
it's really important to keep things
| | 00:08 | organized so you don't waste time and
effort searching for the tools you want,
| | 00:11 | moving things around, and
closing and opening panels.
| | 00:14 | Furthermore, you can do so many
different things with an application like
| | 00:17 | InDesign that you are going to want
different tools in front of you at different
| | 00:20 | times for different tasks.
That's why Adobe created workspaces.
| | 00:24 | With workspaces you can create and save
custom arrangements of panels suited to
| | 00:28 | whatever your workflow happens to be.
| | 00:31 | So let's see how we can set up a
workspace for use with interactive documents.
| | 00:35 | You can see the Workspace menu in the
application bar at the top of your screen.
| | 00:38 | And if you don't see it, go to the
Window menu and choose Application Bar.
| | 00:43 | By default, you'll be in this
Essentials workspace, which is a simple display
| | 00:47 | with just a few panels visible.
| | 00:49 | But there are several
others that come with InDesign.
| | 00:52 | If you're just getting started with CS6,
take a look at the New in CS6 workspace.
| | 00:57 | It's really helpful for discovering new
features, since every menu displays new
| | 01:01 | features in blue highlighting.
| | 01:02 | So I'll take a look at the Object
menu and I can see that there are new
| | 01:04 | choices in Text Frame Options, and in
Interactive I can see all my new PDF form tools here.
| | 01:11 | And it also has features that were
new in CS5.5 highlighted in purple.
| | 01:17 | For Interactive documents, Adobe
provides two workspaces for you to choose from.
| | 01:20 | The first is Digital Publishing.
| | 01:23 | The Digital Publishing workspace
replaces the Interactive workspace from
| | 01:26 | CS5.5. In the Digital Publishing
workspace I have two columns of panels. One
| | 01:32 | column is general-use panels
collapsed to just icons, and the other is a
| | 01:37 | set of panels specific to interactivity, and
these are expanded so you can see the full names.
| | 01:42 | Obviously, if we're creating
interactive documents, things like animation and
| | 01:46 | object states and buttons and
forms are going to be important.
| | 01:49 | You can also see the new Folio
Builder panel for working with Adobe Digital
| | 01:53 | Publishing Suite projects, and
we'll be using this a lot later on.
| | 01:57 | There is another workspace that comes
with CS6 that's relevant here, and that's
| | 02:01 | the Interactive for PDF Workspace.
| | 02:03 | In this workspace, I have one main
column of panels with things like Page
| | 02:07 | Transitions, Hyperlinks, Bookmarks,
Buttons and Forms, and the SWF Preview panel,
| | 02:14 | which used to just be called the Preview panel.
| | 02:16 | In addition you have the
Sample Buttons And Forms library.
| | 02:20 | It's over here by itself,
and it's collapsed to an icon.
| | 02:22 | You can click on it to see all the
sample buttons that you can use with PDF
| | 02:26 | forms, things like check boxes,
radio buttons, and combo boxes.
| | 02:30 | And both of these workspaces are
okay for working with interactive
| | 02:32 | documents, but you can always tweak them to
make them even better for your needs and habits.
| | 02:36 | So let's customize the Interactive
for PDF workspace and save it as a new
| | 02:40 | workspace that's even more useful.
| | 02:42 | First of all, let's pull off the Sample
Buttons And Forms library and close it.
| | 02:47 | If you're going to be creating your own
buttons and forms, you really won't need
| | 02:50 | this one at your fingertips taking up
screen space, and you can always get at
| | 02:53 | the library right in the
Buttons and Forms Panel menu.
| | 02:57 | So if I choose Buttons and Forms, in the
Panel menu I can open Sample Buttons and Forms.
| | 03:01 | I'll close that.
| | 03:02 | I am also going to pull off this whole
grouping for Color, Stroke, Gradient, and Swatches.
| | 03:08 | Since I don't use most of these--I
just use Swatches very often--so I'll take
| | 03:11 | that off, I'll close the other three,
and I'll take Swatches and drop it in
| | 03:15 | with Links and Layers.
| | 03:18 | I'll add Pages and Page Transitions to
that group, and I'll also add the Liquid
| | 03:23 | Layout panel by choosing Window >
Interactive > Liquid Layout.
| | 03:27 | I'll pull that off the grouping, add it
to that grouping, and close the other one.
| | 03:33 | Now I'll move the SWF Preview panel to
the top by itself and expand it to give
| | 03:37 | myself nice large previews.
| | 03:38 | I'll open it and drag the bottom-left corner.
| | 03:46 | Now let's create a grouping for
animation and interactivity features.
| | 03:49 | I'll add Buttons and Forms
to Hyperlinks and Bookmarks.
| | 03:54 | I'll put Media in there too.
| | 03:56 | I'll open the Animation panel by
opening Window > Interactive > Animation.
| | 04:01 | I'll drop that in there.
| | 04:04 | And I'll open the Timing panel, put
that right under Animation, and I'll open
| | 04:12 | Object States and put that in there as well.
| | 04:17 | I'll put the DPS Folio panel at
the bottom and close Tool Hints.
| | 04:27 | So what I end up with is four groupings,
the SWF Preview panel by itself so I
| | 04:31 | can have a nice large preview;
| | 04:33 | I have panels related to my
document structure in the next grouping,
| | 04:36 | panels related to interactivity in the
third grouping, and then panels related
| | 04:41 | to the DPS projects by themselves at the bottom.
| | 04:44 | This all just makes sense to my brain.
You should play around and experiment and
| | 04:47 | see what arrangement of
panels makes the most sense to you.
| | 04:50 | And just to save even more screen space,
let's also collapse all the panels down
| | 04:54 | to icons by clicking and dragging to the right.
| | 04:58 | Now to save this arrangement as a new
workspace, I'll go to the Workspace menu
| | 05:02 | and choose New Workspace. I'll give it
a name. I'll call this one Interactive
| | 05:08 | Documents, but you can call
yours what you like and click OK.
| | 05:11 | And if for any reason I want to go
back to the default workspaces that came
| | 05:14 | with InDesign I can just
choose one of them from the menu.
| | 05:18 | Notice that my New workspace is set apart
from the defaults in the menu at the top.
| | 05:22 | Also, if I make a mess of any workspace
by moving panels around or closing them
| | 05:26 | or opening new ones, I can always just
choose Reset down below and that will
| | 05:30 | clean up the arrangement and set
it back to the way that I saved it.
| | 05:33 | So just as with setting preferences,
it pays to create and use a workspace
| | 05:36 | that's tailored to the way you like
to work and what you're working on.
| | 05:40 | The few minutes it takes to set up a
custom workspace can save you plenty
| | 05:43 | of time when you have the right
panels, right where you want them, ready
| | 05:46 | for action.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding intent and presets| 00:00 | It's important to get your
documents started out the right way.
| | 00:03 | Every time you create a document
in InDesign you have to declare an
| | 00:07 | intended output, whether you're
creating it for print or the web or for
| | 00:10 | digital publishing.
| | 00:11 | Of course, you can output any
document to any medium, but by selecting the
| | 00:15 | right intent to begin with, you can save the
trouble of having to change things later on.
| | 00:20 | So, let's see how this intent setting works
and exactly what effects it has on our documents.
| | 00:25 | So, begin right the beginning by
creating a new document. I'll choose File > New >
| | 00:29 | Document, and in the New Document
dialog box, one of the first things you might
| | 00:34 | notice is this menu for Intent.
| | 00:37 | The Intent menu was introduced in CS5
where you could choose either Web or
| | 00:40 | Print, but now in CS6 we have three
choices: Print, Web, and the new one,
| | 00:46 | Digital Publishing.
| | 00:47 | This is a really important selection,
because it sets up several aspects of your
| | 00:50 | document which are not that easily
changed later on, so it's important not to be
| | 00:55 | careless and ignore the Intent
setting when you create a new document.
| | 00:58 | So let's see which things are
controlled by this Intent setting.
| | 01:00 | First, I'll expand the dialog box by
clicking on More Options, just so we can see
| | 01:05 | all the settings. And if I create a
document with Print Intent, I can see that by
| | 01:09 | default it's going to have facing pages,
it's going to be letter-sized and in
| | 01:14 | portrait orientation, and the
units are going to be in picas.
| | 01:18 | In addition, a print intent document
will have CMYK swatches and use the CMYK
| | 01:23 | Transparency blend space.
| | 01:24 | If I switch to Web Intent, the default
document size is now 800 pixels x 600
| | 01:30 | pixels, in landscape orientation, and Facing
Pages are turned off, and my units are in pixels.
| | 01:39 | If I switch to Digital Publishing
Intent, now my Page Size is set to be iPad
| | 01:44 | 1024 x 768. It's also in landscape
orientation, Facing Pages are off, and I
| | 01:51 | have this setting turned on, Primary
Text Frame. And like Web Intent, Digital
| | 01:55 | Publishing Intent also gives you RGB
swatches and uses RGB transparency blend space.
| | 02:01 | Creating a document with Digital
Publishing Intent also switches the Pages
| | 02:04 | panel to display pages by alternate
layout, and this could potentially be a
| | 02:08 | little confusing or even annoying,
since the Pages panel display preference is
| | 02:12 | global for all documents.
| | 02:14 | So if you have the panel set to display
pages horizontally, the moment you create
| | 02:18 | a document with Digital Publishing
Intent here, the preference is changed and
| | 02:22 | all documents will display
pages by alternate layout.
| | 02:25 | You can of course switch it back in
the Pages panel to whatever you want, but
| | 02:29 | it's just something to be aware of.
| | 02:30 | You might also want to take advantage
of the ability to save settings in this
| | 02:33 | dialog box by saving a preset.
| | 02:35 | So by saving and selecting a preset,
you save yourself the time and effort of
| | 02:38 | changing individual settings
to be the way you want them.
| | 02:42 | You just set them up the way you want to
and then click Save Preset and give it a name.
| | 02:47 | After you do that, you'll be able to
pick your preset from this Document
| | 02:49 | Preset menu. That way you won't have to worry
about making a mistake or missing a setting.
| | 02:55 | So by understanding the Intent
setting and the presets in the New Document
| | 02:58 | dialog box, you can be sure to quickly
setup your new documents right from the
| | 03:01 | start, no matter what
destination you have in mind for them.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with images and swatches| 00:00 | Regardless of where your documents
are going to be viewed, you want them to
| | 00:03 | look their best, and of course you want
your output to be consistent and predictable.
| | 00:08 | You can get a wide range of results
from the same document when you output to
| | 00:11 | interactive PDF and Adobe DPS,
especially if you're working with files that
| | 00:16 | were originally created for print.
| | 00:18 | Let's take a look. As we saw in an earlier
movie, you can select an intent for a document,
| | 00:22 | either Print, Web, or Digital Publishing.
| | 00:25 | This intent will determine the
color space used by the swatches and the
| | 00:29 | Transparency blend space.
| | 00:30 | If you have a document with Print intent it
will have CMYK swatches and use CMYK blend space.
| | 00:36 | If you have a document with Web or
Digital Publishing intent, it will have RGB
| | 00:40 | swatches and use RGB blend space.
| | 00:43 | And you won't see any major color
shifts if you output to your intended media.
| | 00:47 | But what if you have a document that
mixes RGB and CMYK, like a document that
| | 00:51 | was created with Print
intent and contains RGB photos?
| | 00:55 | What happens if you want to output
that document to interactive PDF and DPS?
| | 00:59 | Well, things can get interesting.
| | 01:01 | To illustrate, I have two documents open.
The one on the left was created with
| | 01:05 | Digital Publishing intent and the
one on the right with Print intent.
| | 01:09 | I place the same photo of a flower in
both files; it's an RGB Photoshop file,
| | 01:13 | and you can see that it's really very
saturated with colors that are out of
| | 01:17 | gamut for CMYK printing.
| | 01:18 | But right now I'm not viewing the print
document with proof colors, so it looks
| | 01:22 | the same as the Digital Publishing document.
| | 01:24 | But if I select the Print document and I
choose View > Proof Colors, you can see the shift.
| | 01:31 | All those saturated purples and
blues are compressed into the CMYK gamut.
| | 01:36 | Likewise, I can get the same result if I
turn off Proof Colors and I add transparency.
| | 01:42 | So I'll select the photo of the
flowers and I'll add a drop shadow.
| | 01:47 | Whenever you add transparency, InDesign
displays all the colors on the spread in
| | 01:51 | the Transparency blend space,
which for this document is CMYK.
| | 01:55 | I can see that by going to Edit >
Transparency Blend Space, and it's Document CMYK.
| | 02:01 | And if I output this document to a print PDF,
these are the colors that I can expect to get.
| | 02:06 | So far, this all makes sense, but what if
I export this document to Interactive PDF?
| | 02:11 | Well let's try it.
| | 02:12 | I'll press Command+E or Ctrl+E.
I'll just export it to the desktop. Format,
| | 02:16 | Adobe PDF (Interactive), and click Save.
| | 02:20 | I'll accept the defaults and click OK.
| | 02:23 | And before I can really export, I get a
warning, telling me that this document
| | 02:27 | is using CMYK blend space and the
colors are going to be converted to RGB.
| | 02:32 | I'll just click OK and see what happens,
and sure enough, I get those saturated
| | 02:38 | blues and purples again, not
what I saw in the proof colors.
| | 02:43 | So the point here is that my colors
were not converted to CMYK, even though the
| | 02:46 | proof colors indicated that they would be.
| | 02:49 | InDesign was smart enough to realize
that it had RGB colors to begin with, so
| | 02:53 | it made no sense to convert to CMYK
and then back again to RGB; it just left
| | 02:57 | those RGB colors alone.
| | 02:59 | This is great, except that the colors
in InDesign give you a false impression
| | 03:02 | of what the interactive PDF will look
like. That's what that warning dialog box
| | 03:06 | was trying to tell you.
| | 03:08 | So the best remedy is the one
mentioned in the warning dialog box,
| | 03:11 | to go back to the document and change
the Transparency blend space to RGB. Now
| | 03:19 | these are the colors that I can
expect to get in my interactive PDF.
| | 03:23 | Now, what happens if I were to
export this content to a folio for DPS?
| | 03:27 | Well, the results are different.
| | 03:29 | Later on in this course, we'll go into
detail about working with folios, but for
| | 03:32 | now, I've set up a folio already to export this.
| | 03:37 | So I'll go down to my Folio Builder
panel. And I've created a folio with an
| | 03:41 | article called PrintIntent, and let's preview it.
| | 03:48 | And right now, because I'm using RGB
blend space, I get those RGB colors.
| | 03:52 | Let's go back to the document again, choose
Transparency Blend Space > CMYK this time.
| | 03:59 | Note that I have the CMYK proof colors.
| | 04:01 | I'll update the article in the Folio
Builder panel and preview it again.
| | 04:10 | And now I get those CMYK colors.
| | 04:13 | It's really RGB colors, but it has been
converted to CMYK on the way out, so it
| | 04:17 | looks like the CMYK colors.
| | 04:19 | On one hand, this may be what you want,
since this is a repurposing of a print
| | 04:23 | product and these colors might be
closer to those of the print product.
| | 04:26 | In other cases, this might not be
desirable. The flower image had lots of
| | 04:30 | bright saturated colors that don't have to be
lost if we're outputting to a non-screen format.
| | 04:34 | There is no reason to compress
those colors into a print gamut here.
| | 04:38 | And in fact, you don't
have to if you don't want to.
| | 04:40 | Again, just use RGB blend
space before you export.
| | 04:44 | So, to summarize, when it comes to
color, the Transparency blend space will
| | 04:48 | determine how colors are rendered in a
DPS folio, but outputting to Interactive
| | 04:52 | PDF will always use RGB blend space.
| | 04:55 | It's important to understand this so
you can always get the colors you want and
| | 04:59 | expect in your interactive documents.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Installing scripts| 00:00 | Whenever you're working with InDesign,
it's important to take advantage of every
| | 00:03 | possible efficiency to
save yourself time and effort.
| | 00:06 | One of the greatest ways to do this
is to use scripts for repetitive tasks,
| | 00:10 | so let's see how we can install scripts to
use when working with interactive documents.
| | 00:15 | Most of the time when you run scripts
that work with InDesign, you're going to
| | 00:17 | do it through the Script panel,
which you can open by choosing Window > Utilities > Scripts.
| | 00:24 | Inside the panel you'll see two folders,
| | 00:26 | an Application folder that contains
several scripts that come as samples with
| | 00:30 | InDesign, and a User
folder that's empty by default.
| | 00:33 | You can place scripts that you want
to use in either folder, but I usually
| | 00:36 | recommend that people put scripts inside
the User folder, just to keep them separate from the samples.
| | 00:41 | To get a script to appear in the User
folder, right-click on the folder and
| | 00:45 | choose Reveal in Finder or Reveal in Explorer.
| | 00:48 | This opens a folder called the Scripts panel.
| | 00:50 | Anything you put in here will appear
in the User folder, inside the Scripts
| | 00:54 | panel, so let's do that.
| | 00:56 | I'll open a new window, I'll go to my
Exercise Files folder, and in here is a
| | 01:01 | script. I'll drop that into the Script
panel folder, close these windows, go
| | 01:08 | back to InDesign, and there's the script.
| | 01:11 | Once the script is in there, you can
right-click on it to get a menu of choices:
| | 01:14 | to run the script, edit it, reveal it
in your operating system, or to delete it.
| | 01:20 | Scripts are great timesavers when
you're working in InDesign, and now that you
| | 01:23 | know how to install them, this
concludes our look at setting up InDesign for
| | 01:27 | working with interactive documents.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Creating Documents for Multiple ScreensUsing Liquid Layout| 00:00 | Designing and adapting layouts so they
look good on different devices can be
| | 00:03 | quite a challenge, and using Liquid
Layout can help you meet this challenge.
| | 00:08 | Nowadays, it's likely that your
interactive documents are going to be viewed
| | 00:11 | on devices like cell phones and tablet
computers with different screen sizes and orientations.
| | 00:16 | Creating new layouts for each scenario
can be a huge challenge since you need to
| | 00:20 | make your content look good
no matter where it's viewed.
| | 00:22 | There are several new features in
InDesign CS6 devoted to helping you adopt
| | 00:27 | layouts and deliver them for
different screen sizes and orientations.
| | 00:30 | In this chapter, we'll take an
introductory look at all of these new features.
| | 00:35 | And if you're interested in a more
in-depth look, check out Anne-Marie
| | 00:38 | Concepcion's InDesign CS6 New Features
in the lynda.com online training library.
| | 00:43 | Anne-Marie has a whole chapter
devoted to flexible layouts, with almost an
| | 00:47 | hour of new content.
| | 00:49 | In InDesign, Liquid Layout is both the
name of a new panel and a group of rules
| | 00:53 | that you use to adjust the layout
when you change the size of a page.
| | 00:57 | It's basically an upgrade of the old Layout
Adjustment feature with lots of new options.
| | 01:01 | And there is a lot to learn about Liquid
Layout, but we will take a look at some
| | 01:03 | very simple examples just so you
can grasp what's going on here.
| | 01:07 | So here we have a page with just one
placed photo and one text frame and I've
| | 01:11 | duplicated the page four times, so we
look at what happens to each of these
| | 01:14 | items when we change the page
orientation from vertical to horizontal using
| | 01:19 | each liquid page rule.
| | 01:20 | I am going to click on the Page tool,
and at first I notice a few things.
| | 01:27 | First of all, up in the control panel I
can see the current page size is set to
| | 01:31 | 1024 x 768, which corresponds to the
iPad preset and it's in Landscape mode.
| | 01:36 | But what I am really interested in here
is this menu, the Liquid Page Rule, which
| | 01:41 | is currently set to Off.
| | 01:43 | The other main thing I notice when I
select the Page tool is that the page
| | 01:46 | itself has control handles, just like frames do.
| | 01:49 | If I go ahead and click and drag one
of those handles, I can see the page size
| | 01:52 | change, but nothing else moves.
| | 01:55 | And when I let go of my mouse button,
the page snaps back to its original size.
| | 01:59 | Now the reason nothing moved is that
Liquid Page Rule I have selected is Off.
| | 02:03 | I have to pick a different
Liquid Page rule to get some results.
| | 02:07 | Also the reason that the page snapped
back is that I have to add a modifier key
| | 02:11 | to make the page-size change stick.
| | 02:13 | I have to hold down Option on the Mac or Alt
on the PC when I let go of my mouse button.
| | 02:17 | So I'll do that now, hold down Option
or Alt, and you can see the page size
| | 02:23 | changed. I am going to undo.
| | 02:26 | Let's try some Liquid Page rules.
| | 02:28 | So the first I'll pick from the menu is Scale.
| | 02:31 | If I drag the page with the Page tool,
you can see that both the photo and the
| | 02:35 | text frame scale up and they scale down,
so they always fit inside the page.
| | 02:42 | I can hold Shift to
constrain the page dimensions.
| | 02:47 | Keep that in mind as I click the button in
the control panel to switch to Portrait mode.
| | 02:52 | You can see that InDesign shrunk the page
objects to keep them inside the page boundaries.
| | 02:57 | Now let's go to page 2, starting out
from the same point, and for this page I'll
| | 03:04 | choose the Liquid Page rule Re-center.
| | 03:05 | I'll click on page 2 with the Page
tool and as I drag the page, you can see
| | 03:12 | that the objects always try to stay centered,
no matter how big or small I make the page.
| | 03:16 | When I click on Portrait,
| | 03:21 | you can see that they stay centered
but now they're hanging off the sides.
| | 03:24 | So Re-center has no regard for
whether objects stay on the page or not.
| | 03:28 | It's probably most useful in cases where
the page size is increasing for this reason.
| | 03:33 | Now I'll go to page 3 and for this page,
we are going to try a Liquid Page rule called Object-based.
| | 03:40 | When I click on an object now with the
Page tool, you can see that it gets a
| | 03:44 | thick border around it that's in the
same color as the layer, and I have these
| | 03:50 | lines going through the object and
these circles around all four sides.
| | 03:55 | So what do these things mean?
| | 03:56 | Well, the dotted lines inside the frame
control whether the object can resize
| | 04:01 | horizontally or vertically, and I can
click anywhere on the dotted line to change
| | 04:05 | it from fixed to flexible.
| | 04:07 | So right now I see the spring,
meaning it will be flexible when it
| | 04:10 | resizes vertically.
| | 04:12 | If I click, now there is a padlock
icon on there, so it's fixed vertically.
| | 04:17 | I can click again to make it flexible.
| | 04:19 | So let's see what happens when both the
height and width of a photo are locked.
| | 04:22 | I'll click both of the lines to lock
both dimensions and resize the page.
| | 04:29 | And you can see that text frame
changes size, but the photo never does.
| | 04:33 | Now, the circles outside the frame are for
pinning it in relation to each page edge.
| | 04:38 | So when I click on the circle, it gets filled in.
| | 04:42 | Now this photo is pinned to the top edge of
the page, and I can also pin it to the left side.
| | 04:47 | Now if I click and drag the page,
the photo always stays pinned to the top and left.
| | 04:54 | Now what would happen if I were to pin
the object to opposite sides of the page?
| | 04:58 | Right now the height of the photo
is locked and it's pinned to the top.
| | 05:01 | But what if I pin it to the bottom as well?
| | 05:04 | It can't be both fixed-height and
pinned to both the top and the bottom;
| | 05:07 | something's got to give.
| | 05:09 | So when I click and drag, you can see
what happens: the photo scales and it stays
| | 05:14 | pinned to the top and bottom.
| | 05:16 | So where there's a conflict between
spacing and sizing applied to an object,
| | 05:20 | the spacing wins out.
| | 05:22 | Also notice that you can't pin an
object in relation to another object.
| | 05:25 | There is no line between
the photo and the text frame.
| | 05:28 | You can only pin objects in
relation to the page edges.
| | 05:31 | So let's pin both of these frames to
the top, and I'll also make sure the photo
| | 05:37 | is pinned to the left
edge and not to the bottom.
| | 05:39 | And we'll allow both objects to resize.
And now we'll change to Portrait mode.
| | 05:49 | You can see that both objects kept
their relation to the top edge and the photo
| | 05:53 | also stayed pinned to the left edge.
| | 05:55 | Both objects also resized,
because we allowed that.
| | 05:58 | Sometimes it can be hard to see
whether an object is fixed or flexible, and it
| | 06:02 | can be tricky to click in just the
right spot to pin or unpin an object.
| | 06:06 | If that's the case, you can use the
Liquid Layout panel to set any of these
| | 06:09 | attributes or to select a
different Liquid Page rule.
| | 06:12 | So over here in my panels I have my
Liquid Layout. I can see my Page rule
| | 06:16 | that's applied and choose a different
one if I wanted to, and when I have an
| | 06:20 | object selected, I can also see which
dimensions have been constrained and
| | 06:24 | where it's been pinned.
| | 06:25 | Let's go to the next page. And we have
one more Liquid Page rule to check out,
| | 06:30 | and that's Guide-based.
| | 06:33 | CS6 introduced a new kind of
guide called a liquid guide.
| | 06:36 | You create liquid guides by selecting the
Page tool first and dragging out a guide.
| | 06:40 | I will undo. Or if you have another tool
like the Selection tool, you can drag out
| | 06:47 | a guide and then click on it
to change it to a liquid guide.
| | 06:52 | You can always tell a liquid guide from
a ruler guide, because a liquid guide is
| | 06:56 | dashed and a regular ruler guide is solid.
| | 06:59 | Objects that are touched by a horizontal
liquid guide will resize vertically and
| | 07:03 | objects that are touched by a vertical
liquid guide will resize horizontally.
| | 07:07 | And this sounds very weird when you
say it out loud, but it makes a lot
| | 07:10 | more sense visually.
| | 07:11 | So let's demonstrate by using the Page
tool, and here I have a vertical liquid guide.
| | 07:16 | It's over my photo, and as I drag the
page, the photo's width changes but
| | 07:21 | its height never does.
| | 07:25 | And notice that the frame
doesn't resize around the guide.
| | 07:28 | It doesn't matter exactly where the
guide is, as long as it touches the photo.
| | 07:32 | The guide is just a means of marking a
page item to tell InDesign it is okay to
| | 07:36 | move and resize the item.
| | 07:37 | I am going to switch to my Selection
tool, I am going to remove this liquid
| | 07:42 | guide, and I am going to
drag out a horizontal one.
| | 07:45 | I'll click to make it a liquid guide.
| | 07:49 | Now this liquid guide intersects
both the photo and the text frame.
| | 07:53 | Now with my Page tool, I'll drag again,
and you can see that both items resize
| | 08:00 | vertically but not horizontally.
| | 08:07 | I can also add a couple of vertical
liquid guides, and now both objects are
| | 08:13 | allowed to resize vertically and horizontally.
| | 08:16 | So when I switch the document to
Portrait mode, both frames resized.
| | 08:21 | And I get some decent results.
| | 08:23 | It's not perfect. The text frame has some
overset text down here that I'd need to
| | 08:26 | fix, and it's not quite as good as Object-based.
| | 08:30 | But it's still better in most cases
than using the Re-center or Scale rules.
| | 08:34 | In addition to the four Liquid Page
rules we just saw, you probably also noticed
| | 08:38 | another item in the Liquid Page
rule menu called Controlled by Master.
| | 08:42 | Docking the pages with this Liquid Page
rule applied will follow whatever rule
| | 08:46 | was applied to their master page.
| | 08:48 | There's no doubt there's a lot to
learn when it comes to adopting layouts to
| | 08:51 | different screen sizes and orientations.
| | 08:54 | Keep your initial explorations very
simple, with pages that have just a few
| | 08:58 | page objects on them, like this, and it will be
much easier to understand Liquid Page rules.
| | 09:03 | Another thing to keep in mind is that
these tools may not be able to completely
| | 09:06 | handle the task of adapting your layouts.
| | 09:08 | You probably will still have some
manual work to do in addition to setting the
| | 09:12 | Liquid Page rules to get everything
where you need it to be on resized pages.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating alternate layouts| 00:00 | Once you have a grasp of Liquid Layout,
the task of creating alternate layouts
| | 00:04 | for different screen sizes and
orientations can be done without a lot of hassle
| | 00:08 | and unwanted surprises. Let's see how they work.
| | 00:11 | So here I have a document, and the
document size is 1024 x 768 in a vertical
| | 00:16 | orientation. And I'd like to create a
second horizontal version, because I want
| | 00:21 | to publish this document to the
iPad and when the user turns the iPad
| | 00:25 | horizontally, I want the
layout to fit that orientation.
| | 00:28 | So in this document, all document pages
are based on one master page. So if I go
| | 00:33 | to the Pages panel, I can see I have
just one master page, A-Master, and all my
| | 00:37 | document pages are based on that.
| | 00:38 | I am going to double-click on it to
look at the A-Master page, and I'm going to
| | 00:42 | take the Page tool and select this master page.
| | 00:45 | I can see up in the control panel
that the Liquid Page rule in effect is
| | 00:49 | Object-based, and if I click on the
picture frame, I can see that it's height
| | 00:53 | and width are flexible with these
little springs here, and it has been pinned to
| | 00:58 | the top and the sides--that I can
tell by the little filled-in circles.
| | 01:03 | The text frame underneath has not been
pinned, so all the circles are white and
| | 01:07 | its height and width are also flexible.
| | 01:09 | Also, I want to look at this Text
Frames option, so I'll take my Selection
| | 01:13 | tool and I'll Option+Double-Click or Alt+Double-Click to
bring up the Text Frame Options dialog box.
| | 01:18 | And the specific option I'm
interested here is a new one in CS6, and that's
| | 01:22 | called Auto-Size. I can see that the
text frames in this document that are based
| | 01:27 | on this text frame will expand in
height only from the top. Cancel out.
| | 01:33 | And now I'm ready to create my alternate layout.
| | 01:35 | In the Pages panel, I'll double-click
to view page 1, and I'll right-click in
| | 01:40 | that area and choose View Pages > By
Alternate Layout. Then I'll click on the
| | 01:45 | little triangle next to the layout name
and choose Create Alternate Layout.
| | 01:50 | And InDesign rightly guessed that I want a
horizontal version of my vertical iPad
| | 01:54 | layout and for the Liquid Page Rule,
I'm going to choose Preserve Existing,
| | 01:59 | although I could overrule that by
picking a Liquid Page Rule from this menu.
| | 02:03 | I'm going to leave the other settings at
their defaults and click OK. And now I have
| | 02:08 | a horizontal version of my vertical layout.
| | 02:11 | I can click the button at the bottom of
my window in the bottom-right corner and
| | 02:15 | split the layout view, and now I can
view both of my layouts side by side.
| | 02:19 | So in this window I'll view the
vertical layout, and in this one I'll view
| | 02:22 | the horizontal layout.
| | 02:24 | Close up the Pages panel a little bit
and move the divider over so I can see
| | 02:30 | a little bit better. And I can page
through and check out each page to compare them.
| | 02:39 | Now, there are couples of things I want
to point out about the alternate layout.
| | 02:42 | The first thing is, notice that we now
have icons in the top of each frame,
| | 02:47 | these little link icons. That means
that the content in these frames is linked
| | 02:51 | to the original layout.
| | 02:53 | So if I make a change in the original
layout--say I'll take this word out--go to
| | 02:58 | my alternate layout and now I can see
that the text has been modified here, so
| | 03:02 | if I switch to my Selection tool and
click on the Modified icon, the text
| | 03:06 | update, so I have the same
text in both of my layouts.
| | 03:10 | The second thing I want to point out
is in the Paragraph and Character Styles
| | 03:13 | panel, so I'll open them up by choosing
Window > Styles > Paragraph Styles. And I
| | 03:19 | can see that InDesign has gone ahead
and created style sets for each of my
| | 03:22 | layouts. So if I tip them open, I have
paragraph styles for the iPad Vertical
| | 03:26 | and the iPad Horizontal.
| | 03:29 | So if need to tweak the paragraph or
character styles for one of the layouts, I
| | 03:32 | don't have to mess up the text
formatting in one layout, or create and apply new
| | 03:37 | styles; this can be a real time saver.
| | 03:39 | The options to create these style sets
and to link the stories were in those
| | 03:43 | defaults that I left selected in the
Create Alternate Layout dialog box.
| | 03:47 | So the ability to quickly create
multiple alternate layouts and keep them in
| | 03:51 | the same document can be useful for
lots of different workflows, including a
| | 03:54 | traditional print workflow, but it's
especially useful for creating documents
| | 03:58 | you want to deliver onscreen to
different devices with varying screen sizes
| | 04:02 | and orientations.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using primary text frames| 00:00 | One of the most powerful features
inside InDesign is Master pages.
| | 00:04 | They allow you to create a page
design once and use it across an unlimited
| | 00:08 | number of document pages.
| | 00:09 | But prior to CS6 there was always a
pretty big flaw with Master pages and that
| | 00:13 | was the Master text frame.
| | 00:15 | In CS6 the Master text frame has
been replaced with something called the
| | 00:19 | primary text frame and it's a welcome
improvement when you have to make big
| | 00:22 | adjustments to a layout.
| | 00:23 | For example, when you have to adapt the
layout created for an iPad so it's look
| | 00:27 | good on a Kindle Fire, or when you need
to fit a different orientation, so when
| | 00:31 | you're going from a vertical
layout to a horizontal or vice versa.
| | 00:35 | So to show how the primary text
frameworks I have a document here that's a
| | 00:38 | college course catalog and there are
several pages with course listings.
| | 00:42 | So we'll look at a few
of them and we'll go back.
| | 00:46 | All these pages are based on a
Master page called courses, so I'll
| | 00:51 | double-click to view that, press the
W key on my keyboard so I can view the
| | 00:56 | frame edges and here I can see a text
frame with three columns and this is my
| | 01:00 | primary text frame.
| | 01:01 | I know it's a primary text frame
because of this new icon I have here on the
| | 01:05 | left-hand side that tells
me is the primary text frame.
| | 01:09 | If I click with my Type tool and draw
out a new frame and select that, I can
| | 01:14 | see I have a different icon here this one
indicates that it's not a primary text frame.
| | 01:19 | I click and drag to select both of them.
| | 01:21 | I can see that if I click on my new
frame I can make it the primary text frame,
| | 01:26 | so it now has that icon
and the other one does not.
| | 01:30 | So the first to know about a primary
text frame is that you can have only one of
| | 01:33 | them on a Master page.
| | 01:36 | The second thing to know about a primary
text frame is that it can't contain any
| | 01:39 | content on the Master page.
| | 01:40 | If I delete this frame and make my old
frame or primary text frame again and I
| | 01:45 | try to type to some content into it and
select it, I can see that it's no longer
| | 01:50 | a primary text frame.
| | 01:51 | I have to delete the content out and reset it.
| | 01:56 | Now I'm going to go back to the
document pages that were based on this Master
| | 02:01 | and I can see that they have three columns.
| | 02:03 | If I wanted to change some of these
pages to use a four column design, this is
| | 02:08 | no problem thanks to the primary text frame.
| | 02:11 | So I'll go to the Master pages area
I'll right-click in their and choose New
| | 02:14 | Master and I'll call it Prefix D,
Name 4 column and I'll base it on the
| | 02:22 | C-Courses and click OK.
| | 02:24 | And on the Master page I'll Option or
Alt double-click to bring up my text frame
| | 02:31 | options and I'll change the number of
columns from three to four and click OK.
| | 02:37 | Now I'll apply this to some of my
document pages, so I'll select say page 6 and
| | 02:41 | page 7 and I'll Option+Click or Alt+
Click on my new Master to apply them.
| | 02:46 | I'll go to those document pages by
double-clicking and I can see a have
| | 02:50 | four column design now.
| | 02:52 | And if I zoom out, so I can see more
then one page at a time and click on one
| | 02:57 | of the text frames, I can see that
they're all still linked, this is all still
| | 03:01 | one story of text that flows from the four
column layout into the three column layout.
| | 03:05 | And if I want to go back again so all
the pages use the three column layout,
| | 03:09 | that's no problem either.
| | 03:11 | Again I'll just select both the pages
in the Pages panel and this time I'll
| | 03:15 | Option+Click or Alt+Click on the Courses Master.
| | 03:18 | Select again and the story
is still flowing seamlessly.
| | 03:21 | So you can see that a primary text
frame is a unique new type of Master
| | 03:25 | page object in InDesign.
| | 03:27 | It's literally unique in that you
can have only one of these per Master
| | 03:31 | It's also unique in that you don't
have to override in order to work with
| | 03:35 | it on a document page, and it's unique that
you can't put any text on it on a Master page.
| | 03:40 | But where a primary text frame really
becomes valuable is when you need to apply
| | 03:43 | a different Master to an existing page.
| | 03:46 | The text will flow seamlessly
and there will be no cleanup work.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Content Conveyor| 00:00 | Adapting layouts for multiple page
sizes can be a very time-consuming task.
| | 00:05 | Depending on the complexity of your
layout, you could spend hours copying,
| | 00:08 | pasting, and transforming
content from one document to another.
| | 00:12 | InDesign CS6 has tools that offer you
an entirely new way of reusing content,
| | 00:17 | both within and across documents.
| | 00:19 | Let's see how they work.
| | 00:20 | One of the first things you might
notice when you start using InDesign CS6 is
| | 00:24 | that there are two new tools in the
tool panel, right here between the Gap
| | 00:28 | tool and the Type tool, and these
are the Content Collector tool and the
| | 00:33 | Content Placer tool.
| | 00:35 | When you select either one, InDesign
displays a third tool called the Content Conveyor.
| | 00:40 | The Conveyor doesn't really look or act
like anything else inside InDesign. When
| | 00:44 | you switch to a different tool it disappears,
| | 00:45 | so if I press the V key on my
keyboard to get my Selection tool, the
| | 00:49 | Conveyor goes away.
| | 00:51 | If the press B, the shortcut for the
Content Collector and the Content Placer
| | 00:55 | tools, the Conveyor comes back.
| | 00:57 | To reuse content you first need to load
it into the Conveyor, and for this you
| | 01:00 | use the Content Collector tool.
| | 01:03 | I'll click on it here in the Conveyor.
And when you hover over a frame, you can
| | 01:07 | see a thick border around that frame in
the color of the layer that frame is on.
| | 01:12 | Clicking or dragging items with the Content
Collector tool loads those into the Conveyor.
| | 01:16 | If you want to load everything on a page
or everything in a document, you can go
| | 01:20 | over to the right side of the Conveyor,
click the Load Conveyor button, and here
| | 01:24 | you have some options.
| | 01:25 | If you have a selection, you can load
just the Selection. You can load everything
| | 01:29 | on the page or several pages, or you
can load everything on all pages including
| | 01:33 | what's on the pasteboard.
| | 01:35 | By default, items are grouped into
sets by page, or you can select Create a
| | 01:39 | Single Set for all the objects you are loading.
| | 01:43 | So let's select some content.
| | 01:45 | I'll click on this frame, and I'll drag
over these five frames, and I'll click
| | 01:50 | on this picture frame.
| | 01:52 | Now I can see three previews in my
Conveyor of the items that I've loaded.
| | 01:56 | One of them is a set, indicated by this
number here, which indicates there are
| | 01:59 | five items in this set.
| | 02:01 | Now you might notice that most of the
buttons down here in the Conveyor are all
| | 02:04 | grayed out, and that's because they
only apply to placing content, and I still
| | 02:08 | have the Collector tool selected.
| | 02:10 | So I could either press B on my
keyboard or I can click on the Content Placer
| | 02:14 | tool and these buttons spring to life.
| | 02:16 | I can see a preview of the content I
would place if I clicked at my cursor.
| | 02:20 | So, I'll click in this document and I
can see the "8 Reasons to study at" text
| | 02:26 | frame is loaded right now.
| | 02:27 | I can also see a number in parentheses
indicating the total number of content
| | 02:31 | sets in my Conveyor, which right now is three.
| | 02:34 | And I also see a link icon of my
cursor, which is caused by this Create link being selected.
| | 02:38 | That way if the original page item
changes, I'll get an alert and I can update
| | 02:43 | any linked items. I can use my arrow
keys on the keyboard to navigate through
| | 02:47 | the sets and the items in the
Conveyor and load them for placing.
| | 02:50 | So each time I tap my arrow key I
see a different item at my cursor.
| | 02:54 | I can press the Escape key to remove an
item from my cursor and empty out the Conveyor.
| | 03:00 | I'll just undo to get those items back.
| | 03:03 | To drill down into a set so I can place
an individual item from it, I have to be
| | 03:08 | using the Content Placer tool.
| | 03:09 | So I'll select that and I'll click on
the number 5 to open that set, and now I
| | 03:14 | can see all of the
individual text frames in that set.
| | 03:19 | I can see them at my cursor and
place an individual one if I wanted to.
| | 03:23 | If I want to get back up to the main
level of the Content Conveyor, I can press
| | 03:27 | up arrow on my keyboard or I can click
this little button that looks like I'm
| | 03:30 | going up a stairway in a conveyor.
| | 03:32 | So now that we've collected
some content, let's place it.
| | 03:36 | I'll go over to this document, I'll use
my right arrow key so the 8 Reasons to
| | 03:40 | Study at is at my cursor,
| | 03:42 | and before I click, I'll just mention
that there are three modes you can choose
| | 03:45 | from when placing content.
| | 03:47 | You select a mode by pressing one
of these three buttons right here.
| | 03:50 | The first mode is called Place,
remove from conveyor, and load next.
| | 03:54 | This one is like copy and paste.
| | 03:56 | When you use this mode, the item is
removed from the Conveyor and the next item
| | 04:00 | is loaded into your cursor.
| | 04:02 | So I'll select that and then
I'll click to place each item.
| | 04:10 | And now my Conveyor is empty.
| | 04:12 | I'll undo to reload and we'll try the next mode.
| | 04:18 | This one is called Place
multiple and keep in conveyor.
| | 04:21 | It's more like a library or a mini-bridge.
| | 04:23 | This is the mode you'd use if you
wanted to place the same item multiple times.
| | 04:28 | So with the "8 Reasons to Study at" text
frame in my cursor, each time I click I
| | 04:33 | place that same item.
| | 04:35 | Again I will undo and
we'll look at the third mode.
| | 04:40 | This one is called Place,
keep in conveyor, and load next.
| | 04:43 | And in this mind, this is what I would think
of when I hear the phrase Content Conveyor.
| | 04:47 | It's sort of like you're working on an
assembly line in a layout factory and the
| | 04:51 | page items are on a conveyor belt going
past and it's your job to assemble the
| | 04:54 | layouts piece by piece.
| | 04:56 | So let's try. I'll click and I place
each item once, I'll scroll down to the
| | 05:03 | next page, and then I'm
back to the first item again.
| | 05:07 | One more thing I want to show and
that's how you drill down into a set to place
| | 05:12 | each item individually.
| | 05:14 | I'll scroll to another page, I'll
click on this set, and now I can place each
| | 05:20 | text frame one by one.
| | 05:28 | The Content Collector, Placer, and
Conveyor do take some getting used to, even if
| | 05:32 | you're long-time InDesign user.
| | 05:34 | But they're well worth the effort to
learn because they give you lots of options
| | 05:37 | for collecting and placing content
that never existed before in InDesign.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Linking text| 00:00 | InDesign CS6 makes it easier than ever to
reuse text in multiple places in your documents.
| | 00:06 | In CS5.5 the Place and Link Story feature
only worked within a single document,
| | 00:11 | but in CS6, the single-document
restriction is gone and several new enhancements
| | 00:15 | have been added to the Place and Link features.
| | 00:18 | To begin with, we have
three ways to create linked text.
| | 00:21 | One way will create a link just as
the text content and not the container.
| | 00:25 | The second way creates a link to both
the text and the formatting of a container.
| | 00:29 | And the third way will link to the text
and grab all the linked frames in a story.
| | 00:33 | First we'll link just to the text.
| | 00:35 | So use this method when you want to
create an entirely new independent text
| | 00:39 | frame to house linked text.
| | 00:41 | To do this method I'll go to my first
document and I'll double-click to get my
| | 00:44 | cursor in this text frame.
| | 00:46 | I'll choose Edit > Place and Link.
| | 00:49 | It actually doesn't matter if I have
a blinking cursor or some of the text
| | 00:52 | selected or all of it.
| | 00:54 | All of the text will get
sucked up into the Content Conveyor.
| | 00:57 | So you can see when I chose Place and
Link, the Content Conveyor appeared and I
| | 01:00 | was switched to the Content Placer tool.
| | 01:03 | Also, Create and Link is selected and
grayed out and I have an option to Map
| | 01:08 | Styles, which we'll cover
in detail in a later movie.
| | 01:11 | I'll go to my other document and I'll
click and drag to draw a new text frame.
| | 01:15 | So now what was in five frames in the
original document is in one text frame
| | 01:20 | in the new document.
| | 01:21 | If I go to the Links panel, I can see
the link, with the name of the original
| | 01:26 | InDesign document and a snippet of the text.
| | 01:30 | Now let's test this link.
| | 01:31 | I'll go to my original document
and make a small change in the text.
| | 01:34 | I'll just delete that comma,
| | 01:36 | go to my second document, and I can see the
Link badge is now changed to a modified icon.
| | 01:42 | I am going to press Command or Ctrl on
the PC and click on that badge, and now I
| | 01:46 | can see the text has been
updated and the comma is gone here.
| | 01:51 | I'll scroll down to the second page of my
document and we will try another method.
| | 01:56 | This one you can use if you want to
select both the text content and the
| | 01:59 | formatting of a container.
| | 02:01 | In my first document, I'll use my
Selection tool and select all five text frames.
| | 02:05 | I'll go up to the control
panel and I'll apply a drop shadow.
| | 02:10 | Now even though the drop shadow is
applied to the text, it's really a frame-
| | 02:13 | level formatting attribute.
| | 02:15 | So this is frame-level formatting we have here.
| | 02:17 | I'm going to switch from this
Selection tool to my Content Collector tool, and
| | 02:23 | before I click on the first frame,
I'm going to go down to the Conveyor and
| | 02:27 | deselect Collect All Threaded Frames.
| | 02:29 | Then I'll click on the first frame,
switch to my other document, press B on my
| | 02:35 | keyboard to get the Content
Placer tool, and click and drag.
| | 02:41 | Now I have a link to the text plus that
drop-shadow formatting from the original.
| | 02:46 | I'll scroll down to the next
page and will try the third method.
| | 02:50 | This time before we click with the
Content Collector tool, I'll go down to the
| | 02:54 | Conveyor and select Collect All Threaded Frames.
| | 02:56 | I'll click with the Content Collector
tool and you can see the number 5 here,
| | 03:01 | indicating that I've just
selected five items to place.
| | 03:04 | I'll go to my other document, press
the B key to switch to the Content
| | 03:09 | Placer tool, and click.
| | 03:12 | Now I have the same five frames
that I had in the original document.
| | 03:14 | I have the text and I have
the frame-level formatting.
| | 03:18 | So if I go back to my original document,
pick my Selection tool, and change some
| | 03:23 | of the frame-level formatting--say I'll
select the text frame with the ampersand
| | 03:27 | and I'll take the drop shadow off--
| | 03:29 | I'll go to my other document and now I
can see the formatting has been modified
| | 03:33 | on just this frame.
| | 03:35 | So I'll press Command or Ctrl on the PC,
click on that modified icon, and Update,
| | 03:41 | and now the drop shadow is gone.
| | 03:43 | Now one thing you might be wondering
is, what happens if the original text
| | 03:46 | frame goes missing?
| | 03:48 | In the case of a traditional link, like
a Photoshop or Illustrator file, if one
| | 03:52 | of those goes missing,
you'll have output problems.
| | 03:54 | But in the case of linked text,
there'll be no problem at all with output.
| | 03:58 | If I go to my first document and
delete these frames, I can see in my other
| | 04:03 | document that the links are now missing.
| | 04:05 | But this just means that I can't use
the original story anymore to synchronize
| | 04:09 | the text or the frame formatting.
| | 04:11 | You can also sever these links on
purpose by going to the Links panel, selecting
| | 04:16 | the links, and going to Links
Panel menu and choosing Unlink.
| | 04:22 | Linked text is great for helping you
efficiently reuse content in multiple layouts.
| | 04:27 | You can choose the link to just the
text or you can include the formatting of
| | 04:30 | the text frames as well.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Linking page items| 00:00 | Linked page items are a great help when
you're designing multiple versions of a layout.
| | 00:04 | They allow you to take anything on the
page and reuse exactly as is, or you can
| | 00:09 | define certain attributes to
be independent of the original.
| | 00:12 | So let's take a look at linked page items.
| | 00:14 | I'll select the photo on the left
and I'll choose Edit > Place and Link.
| | 00:21 | This opens up the Content Conveyor, and
you can see that Create Link is selected
| | 00:24 | and grayed out, and I'm also
switched to my Content Placer tool.
| | 00:29 | In the Conveyor, I'm going to select
Place multiple and keep in conveyor.
| | 00:33 | That way I can keep placing these
items a few times and show the different
| | 00:37 | options that I have.
| | 00:38 | I'll go to my other document and
first of all, I can just click to place the
| | 00:43 | item exactly as it was in the original. Or I
can click and drag to scale it as I place it.
| | 00:49 | I'll make a really big copy here.
| | 00:51 | I can also drag and hold Shift
to crop the image differently.
| | 00:58 | Now let's test these links.
| | 00:59 | I'll switch to my Selection tool, and I can
see the link badges on each of the photos.
| | 01:04 | I'll go back to the original photo
and I'll give it rounded corners.
| | 01:08 | I'll click on the yellow square and
I'll drag one of the corners in.
| | 01:14 | So I switched to my other document and I can see
the link badges all now show a modified status.
| | 01:19 | I'll click on the first one to
update it and now it has rounded corners.
| | 01:23 | I'll click on one of the other ones that I
scaled and I get an error message coming up.
| | 01:29 | This is telling me that I've made local
edits to this document and I might lose
| | 01:33 | them if I update a link.
| | 01:34 | In this particular case I'm not going
to loose the rounded corners, so I'll go
| | 01:38 | ahead and update the link, and do
the same for the photo that I cropped.
| | 01:43 | So now I can see I have
rounded corners on all three photos.
| | 01:47 | If I go to the Links panel, I can see
these linked items. And I'll open up the
| | 01:55 | panel and here I can see my linked page items.
| | 01:59 | I'll tip it open and
expand the panel a little bit.
| | 02:03 | So one thing you might notice is that
it looks like I have a duplication here.
| | 02:07 | So I have the linked page items, which
are actually the links back to these
| | 02:10 | objects in my original document, and I have
the links as well to the photo on my disk.
| | 02:15 | If I select just a linked page item,
I can see down here in Linked Info the
| | 02:20 | name of the InDesign document, the name of the
photo, and that it's an external linked object.
| | 02:25 | I can right-click on an item and do all
the usual things that I can do with a
| | 02:29 | link: so I can relink, I can
unlink, or I can look at Link Options.
| | 02:34 | So let's choose Link Options.
| | 02:36 | And here's where I see some of the
most interesting things I can do with
| | 02:39 | the linked page objects.
| | 02:40 | I have all these different options I can select.
| | 02:43 | First of all, I can tell InDesign to
update this link every time I save a document.
| | 02:47 | I can make that warning
that I saw appear or go away.
| | 02:51 | And I can choose to preserve certain
local edits when I update the link.
| | 02:55 | I don't have to have every aspect of my
linked objects be tied to the original.
| | 02:59 | And each one of these, if I hover over it,
I get a little tooltip telling me what
| | 03:03 | kinds of attributes are tied to this selection.
| | 03:06 | The ability to link page items gives you a
great combination of power and flexibility.
| | 03:09 | For each linked item, you can select which
attributes to synchronize with the original item.
| | 03:15 | This kind of flexibility can be
essential for efficiently reusing content.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Fitting frames to content| 00:00 | Another new feature in CS6 that can be
useful in adopting layouts for multiple
| | 00:04 | page sizes is the Auto-Size feature.
| | 00:07 | It can prevent overset text frames and
affect fixing them on the fly so that
| | 00:11 | when you create new layouts, you never
have overset text. Let's take a look.
| | 00:16 | First of all, Auto-Size is a property of
a text frame, and we can get that in the
| | 00:20 | Text Frame Options dialog box.
| | 00:22 | So here I'll select this text
frame and I'll Option+Double-Click or
| | 00:26 | Alt+Double-Click on it to bring up my
Text Frame Options dialog box/ And over
| | 00:29 | here on the right, I have
my new Auto-Size Options.
| | 00:32 | I can see that Auto-Size is currently
turned off for the frame that I have selected.
| | 00:36 | But if I look in the menu, I can see
that I have options to auto size height
| | 00:40 | only, width only, height and width, or
height and width (keep proportions).
| | 00:45 | I'll turn on Preview and
I'll select Height Only.
| | 00:50 | I can see that the height of the text
frame now fits the text and it stayed
| | 00:54 | centered on its original location.
That's because the center button was selected here.
| | 00:59 | But I can also resize, keeping the top
where it was or the bottom where it was.
| | 01:04 | I can also set constraints, like minimum height.
| | 01:07 | Let's try the Width option.
| | 01:09 | I'll select Width Only and now it
resizes the width from the center. But I could
| | 01:14 | choose to resize from the left or the right.
| | 01:17 | And I can also set a minimum width if I
didn't like how narrow the text frame got.
| | 01:22 | Likewise, I can select No Line
Breaks and make the frame be wider.
| | 01:26 | I'll deselect that.
| | 01:28 | Now let's try auto sizing both height and width.
| | 01:31 | Now I have nine options from where I can resize.
| | 01:34 | This text frame got very weird here.
| | 01:36 | It got very narrow and very tall.
| | 01:38 | So what I'd like to do is
set a minimum width on it.
| | 01:41 | I'll click on that and I'll set
600 pixels for the Minimum Width.
| | 01:46 | Let's check out our last option:
Height and Width (Keep Proportions).
| | 01:51 | I'll turn off Minimum Width.
| | 01:52 | And this frame is a square,
| | 01:54 | so no matter how it resizes,
it's going to stay a square.
| | 01:59 | In fact, if I set a minimum width, it
no longer fits the text frame vertically
| | 02:04 | because it's constrained to be a square.
| | 02:05 | So now that we've seen where Auto Fit is
and what it can do, let's see it in action.
| | 02:10 | I'm going to cancel out of this
dialog box and go to the next page of my
| | 02:14 | document, where I have
a very similar text frame.
| | 02:16 | I'm going to select the Page tool,
select this page, and for the Liquid Page rule
| | 02:22 | on this page, I'm going to choose Object-based.
| | 02:24 | I'll click on the text frame, and I can
see by the little spring icons that I
| | 02:28 | have allowed this text frame to resize
in both width and height and I've pinned
| | 02:32 | it to the top and left sides of the page.
| | 02:35 | Now you might think in this case I'd
be all set: I shouldn't get any overset
| | 02:38 | text in this frame because I'm
allowing it to scale in both directions.
| | 02:42 | But watch what happens when I switch
from a horizontal to a vertical layout.
| | 02:45 | I'll switch to my Selection tool and
sure enough, you can see that there is
| | 02:50 | overset text in this frame.
| | 02:52 | So to allow the frame to resize but
not go overset, I need to apply Auto Size.
| | 02:57 | So first, I'll undo the
change to a vertical layout.
| | 03:00 | I'll take my Selection tool and Option+
Double-Click or Alt+Double-Click to bring
| | 03:03 | up those Text Frame Options again.
| | 03:05 | I'll go to Auto-Size and I'll
select auto size Height and Width (Keep
| | 03:10 | Proportions), and I'll select to resize
from the top and left. I'll click OK.
| | 03:17 | Now, I'll switch back to the Page tool, and
again I'll switch to a portrait layout.
| | 03:23 | And this time I don't get overset texts.
| | 03:25 | So here we saw how the new Auto-Size
option for text frames can help you avoid
| | 03:29 | overset text when you adopt your
layouts to different page sizes.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using style mapping| 00:00 | The ability to map styles when we're
using text content is one of the most
| | 00:04 | powerful and useful aspects of the
Content Conveyor in InDesign CS6.
| | 00:08 | But it's not the most intuitive feature.
| | 00:11 | Fortunately, there are just a few key
points to understand and you'll be well on
| | 00:14 | your way to mapping text styles.
| | 00:16 | In this case, I have two documents and I
want to reuse all this content from the
| | 00:20 | document on the left to
the document on the right.
| | 00:23 | And although you can see they are
similarly structured, you can tell that the
| | 00:26 | text formatting differs in the two, and I
would like to have this text formatting
| | 00:30 | from the document on the left changed
so it matches the text formatting in the
| | 00:33 | document on the right.
| | 00:35 | In the past, what I would have to do is
something like copy and paste and then
| | 00:38 | I'd have to apply all the styles from
the document on the right and if I wanted
| | 00:42 | to be neat about it, I'd have to delete
the styles that came in with the text.
| | 00:46 | All in all, it was a pretty
tedious and time-consuming workflow.
| | 00:49 | But now if I use the Content Conveyor,
I can enable style mapping and take some
| | 00:53 | of the pain out of reformatting reused text.
| | 00:56 | So, over in the original document,
I'm going to press the B key on my
| | 00:59 | keyboard to get the Content
Collector tool and when I do so, the Content
| | 01:03 | Conveyor is displayed.
| | 01:05 | I'm going to drag over all the frames
in my original document to load them into
| | 01:08 | the conveyor and I can see
that I loaded three frames.
| | 01:12 | Now Map Styles is grayed out, but
it's selected. Now, why is that?
| | 01:15 | Well, that's because I still have
the Content Collector tool selected.
| | 01:19 | I need to switch to the Content Placer
tool, and now I can edit my style mappings.
| | 01:24 | I'll switch over to my second
document and go to a blank page, and then I'll
| | 01:30 | click on Edit Custom Style Mapping.
| | 01:32 | In the dialog box, I need to pick from
the Source Document which is the one with
| | 01:35 | the original formatting that I am mapping from.
| | 01:38 | For Style Type, I have choices here:
Paragraph, Character, Table, and Cell.
| | 01:42 | In this case, I'm just
going to map paragraph styles.
| | 01:45 | And then I'll click on New Style Mapping.
| | 01:47 | I'll click here and choose a paragraph
style to map for my original document.
| | 01:52 | So I'll start with body text and I'll map
that in my new document to body text_serif.
| | 01:57 | I'll create another style mapping.
I'll map number to number_black. And a
| | 02:06 | third style mapping,
I'll map reason to reason_purple and click OK.
| | 02:14 | Now that the style mapping is set up, I'll click
in my new document and there I have mapped styles.
| | 02:19 | So I can see the color of the number
has changed, the font and style of the
| | 02:24 | heading has changed, and now my text has
gone from sans serif and gray to serif in black.
| | 02:29 | But what if I decided this
wasn't exactly what I wanted?
| | 02:33 | Well, I can actually undo
and change the style mapping.
| | 02:36 | I'll go back to the Conveyor and in
this case, I'll just select the body text
| | 02:41 | and I'll delete that style mapping.
| | 02:42 | So I'll still map the number and reason
paragraph styles, but not the body text.
| | 02:47 | I'll click OK, click back in the
document, and I can see that those two styles
| | 02:52 | mapped, but the third one didn't. In the
battle to efficiently repurpose content,
| | 02:57 | style mapping is one of the secret
weapons lurking in the Content Conveyor.
| | 03:01 | Once you set up custom style mappings,
you can instantly reformat content as
| | 03:04 | it's placed into different
documents and save yourself some effort.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Building an Interactive PDF PresentationReviewing what we're going to build | 00:00 | Over the course of this chapter, we'll
cover the steps in building this file,
| | 00:04 | which is a presentation aimed at
prospective students applying for admission to the
| | 00:08 | Roux Academy of Art, Media & Design.
| | 00:11 | The presentation can be delivered in
either interactive PDF or in SWF format.
| | 00:16 | Right now, I'm in Adobe
Acrobat, looking at the PDF.
| | 00:18 | I'll go into Full Screen mode by
pressing Command+L or Ctrl+L on my keyboard, and
| | 00:24 | in Full Screen mode there's nothing
else to distract from the presentation and
| | 00:28 | the other benefit is that page
transitions work in Full Screen mode.
| | 00:32 | So at the bottom, I have my navigation
controls and if I mouse over them, you
| | 00:35 | can see that they change color. And when
I click to go to the next page, you can
| | 00:40 | see the page transition.
Here's another one and a different one.
| | 00:46 | I can also go to the last page or the
first page of the document, and there is a
| | 00:51 | hyperlink down in the left to navigate to
the Roux Academy web site. I'll close that.
| | 00:58 | I'll press Command+L or Ctrl+L again.
| | 01:01 | I'll press Escape to get out of Full Screen
mode and look at another PDF we can export.
| | 01:08 | This one is a print PDF and it includes a
Notes area for the presenter and the audience.
| | 01:13 | To view the SWF version of the
presentation, I'll switch over to the Flash
| | 01:16 | Player application and I can
also go into Full Screen mode.
| | 01:19 | Here I can have animations, and my
navigation controls work the same as in the PDF file.
| | 01:32 | We'll cover all the how-to's of
animation in depth in a separate chapter.
| | 01:35 | In this chapter, we'll talk a little
about using animation so it enhances,
| | 01:39 | rather than overwhelms, the
message of a presentation.
| | 01:43 | We'll also cover how to structure your
presentation file with master pages and
| | 01:46 | layers to make it efficient to create and use.
| | 01:49 | So now that we've seen examples of a
presentation, let's dive right in and get
| | 01:53 | started making this.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Previewing with the SWF Preview panel| 00:00 | The SWF Preview panel gives you a
convenient and quick way to preview
| | 00:04 | interactive elements like animations,
buttons, page transitions, hyperlinks, and media.
| | 00:10 | Unfortunately, you can't preview
PDF-only features like form fields, but even
| | 00:14 | so, it's a great tool to have in your workflow,
so let's see how to use it.
| | 00:17 | Looking at the first page of my document,
I can see that the title text in this
| | 00:20 | slide is in five separate text frames,
and each text frame has an icon in the
| | 00:25 | bottom right-hand corner indicating
that some animation has been applied to it.
| | 00:28 | If I click on some of the frames, I can
see the motion paths for the animation.
| | 00:33 | So I can see this one will come in from
the left, this one will come in from the
| | 00:37 | bottom, this one will come in from the right,
| | 00:40 | and if I click on the 8 Reasons, I can
see a diagonal motion path showing that
| | 00:44 | this will come from the
center up to the top-left.
| | 00:47 | But by themselves, these motion paths
don't really give me a sense of what the
| | 00:50 | animations will look like.
| | 00:51 | So for that, I need to preview them and
for that, I'll use the SWF Preview panel.
| | 00:56 | I have the SWF Preview panel right
at the top of my workspace, up here by
| | 00:59 | itself, and if I didn't have it, I
could go to Window > Interactive > SWF
| | 01:04 | Preview. Or I could press the
keyboard shortcut Command+Shift+Return or
| | 01:07 | Ctrl+Shift+Enter on the PC.
| | 01:10 | There are also buttons to open the
SWF Preview panel at the bottom of
| | 01:13 | several other panels, like the
Animation panel, the Timing panel, Object
| | 01:21 | States, Media, and Buttons.
| | 01:27 | So there are plenty of ways
to open the SWF Preview panel.
| | 01:31 | I am going to press
Command+Shift+Return and preview this page.
| | 01:37 | I can see the animation starts
playing immediately in the panel.
| | 01:40 | One thing you can do is to make the
panel larger to give you a nice big preview.
| | 01:44 | What's happening when I use the SWF
Preview panel is InDesign actually exports a
| | 01:48 | temporary SWF file that
it displays in the panel.
| | 01:51 | If you're working with especially
complex documents or just on a slower
| | 01:54 | computer, you can actually see the
dialog box where InDesign says it's
| | 01:58 | generating a preview and then
exporting each page to a SWF.
| | 02:02 | So let's take a little tour of what
we can do with the SWF Preview panel.
| | 02:06 | First of all, it's worth memorizing
that keyboard shortcut for previewing:
| | 02:09 | Command+Shift+Return on the Mac
or Ctrl+Shift+Enter on the PC.
| | 02:13 | This will quickly open and close the panel.
| | 02:15 | So I'll press it again to close the
panel and I'll press Command+Shift+Return
| | 02:19 | again to open it and preview this page again.
| | 02:24 | There's another shortcut
worth memorizing too, and that's
| | 02:26 | Command+Shift+Option+Return on the
Mac, Ctrl+Shift+Alt+Enter on the PC.
| | 02:32 | This one previews the entire
document instead of just the current spread.
| | 02:35 | This is the shortcut you'd use if you
want to preview the navigation controls
| | 02:39 | you move from one page to another.
| | 02:41 | The downside of previewing a whole
document is that it can take a little
| | 02:44 | while longer to render.
| | 02:46 | At the bottom of the panel, there's a
Play button to play the preview, which I
| | 02:49 | can also press Option or Alt while I
click that button to replay a preview that
| | 02:54 | I've already generated.
| | 02:55 | This can save you a little
time when you're previewing.
| | 02:57 | Instead of generating a new one
each time, you can just replay the one
| | 03:00 | you've already generated.
| | 03:02 | I can stop the preview.
| | 03:03 | If I am previewing a document, I can
navigate to different pages. And on the
| | 03:08 | right-hand side, I can choose to preview
just a selection, the current spread, or
| | 03:12 | the entire document.
| | 03:14 | Sometimes you may notice that previewing
the whole document seems not to be working.
| | 03:18 | You pressed the shortcut or the button
to preview the whole document and still,
| | 03:21 | all you see is the current page, and the
navigation buttons over here are grayed out.
| | 03:26 | If that's the case, the cause is probably
the Preview settings that the panel is using.
| | 03:30 | When you export a SWF, just like any
other export from InDesign, you have
| | 03:34 | choices of the different settings you can use.
| | 03:36 | These settings determine all
the aspects of your output.
| | 03:39 | In order to preview SWF output,
InDesign needs some settings to use.
| | 03:42 | So if you look in the Panel menu,
you can see Edit Preview Settings.
| | 03:47 | And these are the settings that
InDesign will use to generate previews in
| | 03:50 | the SWF Preview panel.
| | 03:52 | InDesign remembers the settings that
were used the last time a SWF was exported,
| | 03:55 | and that's what it uses in this dialog box.
| | 03:58 | So if the last time someone exported a
SWF they only exported a single page or
| | 04:02 | a range of pages, the so-called
Preview Document mode won't preview the whole
| | 04:06 | document; it will only preview
those pages that were exported.
| | 04:10 | But this is easily fixed.
| | 04:11 | All you'd have to do is go to the Panel
menu, choose Edit Preview Settings, and
| | 04:15 | set this selection to All
Pages and then click Save Settings.
| | 04:19 | And incidentally, those settings will also
be chosen the next time you export a SWF.
| | 04:24 | Let's go back to the Panel menu.
| | 04:25 | There's one more choice I want to
look at, and that's Test in Browser.
| | 04:29 | If I choose that, the temporally SWF
file has exported and it opens in my
| | 04:33 | default browser so I can see and test it.
| | 04:36 | So there you have the SWF Preview panel.
| | 04:38 | It's an essential tool in your
interactive document's workflow.
| | 04:41 | It's handy and easy to use.
| | 04:43 | Just remember those keyboard shortcuts
and remember that what you see in the
| | 04:46 | panel is determined by the Preview
Settings you can access in the Panel menu.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Presentation design tips| 00:00 | The quality and impact of a
presentation depends on a lot of things, not the
| | 00:04 | least of which is the design of the slides.
| | 00:07 | We have all seen lots of presentations:
some great ones, some awful ones, most
| | 00:11 | somewhere in between.
| | 00:12 | But what makes for a great presentation?
| | 00:14 | A lot of it of course is the presenter.
The presenter has to have good knowledge
| | 00:18 | of the material, a presence that keeps
the attention of the audience, and a clear
| | 00:22 | and pleasant manner of speaking. And all
those things can either be enhanced or
| | 00:26 | undermined by the design of the
slides the presenter is using.
| | 00:30 | Let's compare two different approaches.
| | 00:32 | In general, slides should
complement what the speakers saying.
| | 00:35 | They should also echo and underscore it,
not to just repeat it word for word.
| | 00:40 | Slides should be memorable if you want people
to take anything away from the presentation.
| | 00:44 | The worst presentations I've seen are
those where the slides contain so much
| | 00:47 | information that no one could possibly
read and understand it all in the time
| | 00:51 | that it's up on the screen,
| | 00:53 | like this example down at the bottom.
| | 00:54 | I have all 8 bullet points with
paragraphs full of text and each with an image,
| | 00:59 | all in a single slide.
| | 01:01 | So, for a lot of people, they are not
even going to be able to read this because
| | 01:04 | the text is going to be too small.
| | 01:06 | Contrast that to the approach at the
top where all the text is large and bold
| | 01:10 | and you can read it no matter
where you are sitting in the room.
| | 01:13 | Now, when it comes to
animation, the same idea applies.
| | 01:15 | Animation should enhance the ideas in
the presentation, not overwhelm them.
| | 01:20 | And as a wise person once said, just
because you can, doesn't mean you should.
| | 01:24 | Both of these slides have animation.
| | 01:27 | Let's preview the one at the bottom.
| | 01:28 | I have the SWF Preview
panel and I'll press Play.
| | 01:36 | Those dancing bullet points might be
okay in a different context, but they
| | 01:39 | feel inappropriate here.
| | 01:41 | It's a little too silly, and the
movement doesn't enhance the message we are
| | 01:44 | trying to get across in any way.
| | 01:46 | Let's preview the other example.
| | 01:55 | Now in this title slide, there are
still 6 animations, which is a lot.
| | 01:58 | I wouldn't do this on every slide.
| | 02:01 | But here there are specific
goals with these animations.
| | 02:04 | First, the words "8 Reasons" starts out
large to get that phrase in people's minds.
| | 02:08 | They instantly have a sense of the theme of
the presentation, its structure, and its length.
| | 02:13 | So later on, when they are seeing the
4th reason, they have an awareness that
| | 02:16 | they are halfway done.
| | 02:18 | The other animations literally show the
three fields of study coming together at
| | 02:22 | the Roux Academy, and the timing of
each animation follows the reading order.
| | 02:26 | So in each case, the style of
animation serves the theme of the presentation.
| | 02:30 | By taking a simple, thoughtful approach
to your design and using a light hand
| | 02:34 | when it comes to effects and animations,
you can make your presentations more
| | 02:38 | enjoyable and effective.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up a presentation file with layers| 00:00 | Clear organization is one of the
keys to success with presentations.
| | 00:04 | You can make your presentation files a
lot easier to work with and save yourself
| | 00:08 | time and effort by
organizing the content into layers.
| | 00:11 | And when it comes to organizing your
presentation document, you don't have to go
| | 00:14 | wild creating tons of layers.
| | 00:16 | Just like the design of your
presentation, its construction should be as simple
| | 00:20 | and straightforward as you can make it.
| | 00:22 | You can probably set up most
presentations with a standard approach to layering
| | 00:26 | that uses just five layers:
| | 00:27 | navigation, text, images,
background, and guides.
| | 00:32 | If you want to add a layer for media or if
you're doing several different versions
| | 00:36 | of a presentation for different audiences,
then go ahead and create those layers as needed.
| | 00:40 | So to get started, let's create a new document.
| | 00:45 | And in the dialog box if you're not
seeing more options, be sure to select that.
| | 00:48 | I have three choices for Intent:
| | 00:51 | Print, Web, and Digital Publishing.
| | 00:53 | I don't want to choose Print because
this is a presentation and it's primarily
| | 00:57 | going to be viewed onscreen.
| | 00:58 | So I want to choose either
Web or Digital Publishing.
| | 01:01 | And these are very similar both of them
will set my documents measurements in pixels.
| | 01:06 | They'll use RGB swatches and those
are what I want for a presentation.
| | 01:10 | In fact there are only two differences between
Web and Digital Publishing. One is page size.
| | 01:15 | If I choose Web, I get a
document that's 800 x 600.
| | 01:18 | If I choose Digital Publishing, it's 1024 x 768.
| | 01:24 | Digital Publishing also has a
Primary Text Frame selected.
| | 01:28 | Primary Text Frame is a useful feature
when you need to switch master pages that
| | 01:31 | are applied to document pages,
| | 01:33 | but it's not usually necessary for a
presentation file, and it also might get
| | 01:37 | in your way, since primary text frames are
linked by default, so text flows between them.
| | 01:42 | Typically, that's not something you'd need for
a presentation, so I'm going to turn that off.
| | 01:46 | If you know the number of slides you're going
to have, you can set the number of pages here, too.
| | 01:50 | Though that's not necessary, you can
of course add or remove pages later on.
| | 01:55 | You definitely want Facing Pages to be
turned off and Landscape Orientation.
| | 01:59 | For the size of your presentation,
you want to select the smallest size you
| | 02:02 | expect to present at.
| | 02:04 | It's better to have a presentation that
has to scale up to fit a larger screen
| | 02:08 | than one that has to be scaled
down to fit a smaller screen.
| | 02:11 | So typically, you'd
choose values like 1024 x 768.
| | 02:16 | For the Number of Columns, you don't
have to add any additional ones, but using
| | 02:20 | them often helps you come up with a
better more consistent design in less time.
| | 02:24 | Basically, you use the columns like a
standard set of guides on every page to
| | 02:28 | help you set the width of text
columns and position other elements.
| | 02:31 | I'm going to divide my space up into
12 columns and give them a little more
| | 02:35 | space in between, say 16 pixels.
| | 02:39 | For the Margins, I can leave the left
and right sides alone and keep them at the
| | 02:42 | default of 36 pixels.
| | 02:44 | But I'm going to unclick Make all settings
the same and change my top and bottom margins.
| | 02:49 | The Top I want to increase just so the
content isn't starting too high up on
| | 02:53 | the page, so I'll make that 52 pixels. And the
bottom I'm going to make even bigger: 80 pixels.
| | 02:59 | This will give me space for
navigation buttons, branding, and
| | 03:01 | contact information.
| | 03:04 | I don't need a bleed because
this isn't a print project,
| | 03:06 | but I do want a slug area
for my presentation notes.
| | 03:09 | I'll make that 300 pixels on
the right side, and click OK.
| | 03:15 | Now to set up the layers. We're going
to set up those five typical layers that
| | 03:18 | correspond to the different
types of content in our presentation.
| | 03:21 | So from top to bottom, we want navigation,
text, images, background, and guides.
| | 03:27 | Guides will be on the
bottom, so we'll do that first.
| | 03:32 | I'll click on Layer 1 and rename it Guides.
Then I'll Option+Click or Alt+Click on the new layer icon.
| | 03:41 | This way I can create a new layer and
name it at the same time. I'll call this
| | 03:45 | one Background and I'll repeat the
process for Text, Images, and Navigation.
| | 03:56 | If you don't like the default colors
that came with these layers, you can pick a
| | 04:05 | different one by right-clicking and
choosing Layer Options, and then you can
| | 04:09 | pick a different color.
| | 04:11 | You can pick whatever color you want,
but just make sure you have a different
| | 04:13 | color for each layer so you
can tell them apart easily.
| | 04:17 | I'll also recommend that you go
to the Layers Panel menu and choose
| | 04:20 | Paste Remembers Layers.
| | 04:23 | This way when you copy and paste
objects, they'll stay on their current layer
| | 04:26 | and you won't accidentally have
Text on Images layer and so on.
| | 04:30 | Taking the time to set up any
InDesign document with well-organized layers
| | 04:34 | is really worth it.
| | 04:35 | As you go through your project,
you might not even realize how helpful it was to
| | 04:39 | do that because everything is
just where you expect it to be.
| | 04:42 | But someday might get a file from
elsewhere were all the content is disorganized
| | 04:46 | or all crammed onto one layer, and
then you'll quickly see the difference in
| | 04:49 | these approaches and be glad that
you got in the habit of using layers.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a navigation system | 00:00 | It's important to build a navigation
system into your interactive documents, so
| | 00:04 | you can get the content you
want on screen quickly and easily.
| | 00:07 | The way you do that in InDesign is to
create buttons and assign them actions
| | 00:11 | that navigate through the pages of the document.
| | 00:13 | You can also add appearance states so
when the user mouses over a button, it
| | 00:17 | changes its appearance.
| | 00:19 | So let's do that to this document.
| | 00:20 | I will start by going to my Pages panel
and going to my master page and renaming it.
| | 00:26 | So I will right-click, choose Master Options,
| | 00:29 | I will give it a Prefix of N and a
Name of Nav for navigation, and click OK.
| | 00:35 | I will go to my Layers panel and make
sure the Navigation layer is targeted,
| | 00:40 | and I am going to create an area
down at the bottom of each slide for the
| | 00:42 | navigation controls.
| | 00:44 | This is why when I set up the document, I
made the bottom margin larger than the sides.
| | 00:49 | I am going to press the F key on my
keyboard to get my Rectangle Frame tool,
| | 00:53 | and I am going to drag out a rectangle that
touches the sides and the bottom of the document.
| | 00:58 | I will press V to get my Selection tool
and I'll resize this so it's 52 pixels tall.
| | 01:04 | Remember, that was the
margin that I put at the top,
| | 01:06 | so we have some nice symmetry there.
| | 01:08 | Now I will right-click on it and choose
Content > Unassigned, just to get rid of
| | 01:13 | that X going through the frame and
make it a little cleaner looking.
| | 01:16 | I will go up to the Control panel,
I will give it a fill of black and just to
| | 01:22 | make it a little less plain,
I will add an orange line at the top.
| | 01:25 | First of all, I need to
create a swatch for that.
| | 01:27 | So I will go to my Swatches panel, New
Color Swatch, and I will create an orange
| | 01:34 | color: 255 Red, 160 Green, 42 Blue, and click OK.
| | 01:41 | Now I will take my Line tool, I will
click and drag across the document and
| | 01:46 | hold Shift to constrain.
| | 01:49 | In the Swatches panel, I will target
the stroke and apply that orange color.
| | 01:56 | Now I'll select the line and the rectangle
and group them so they don't come apart.
| | 02:00 | And I will also press
Command+L or Ctrl+L to lock them.
| | 02:04 | Let's start creating those
navigation buttons that go down here.
| | 02:07 | I'll zoom in a little bit and I'll
select the Polygon tool from my Tools panel.
| | 02:13 | I will click in the document, and
these are the settings that I want.
| | 02:17 | I want to create a polygon that's 30
pixels in width and height with three
| | 02:21 | sides, so it's a triangle,
and no star inset, and click OK.
| | 02:26 | I'll press Shift+X on my keyboard
to exchange the stroke and fill.
| | 02:29 | So now it has no stroke and a fill of black.
| | 02:32 | I will press V to switch to my
Selection tool, and then I'll click and drag
| | 02:37 | over one of the corners over the top
and to the right, and I'll also hold down
| | 02:41 | Shift to constrain.
| | 02:42 | So I rotate the triangle 90 degrees.
| | 02:45 | I also don't want the
triangle to be really pointy,
| | 02:48 | so I am going round the corners a bit.
| | 02:50 | So I'll go to the control panel, I'll
choose Rounded corners, and a Radius of 4 pixels.
| | 02:58 | I'll select the triangle and in the Fill
controls, I'll reduce the tint from 100 to 50%.
| | 03:04 | Let's move this into position, and this
one will be the basis for my other buttons.
| | 03:10 | I'll hold down Option+Shift or Alt+
Shift to drag over and constrain and make an
| | 03:15 | extra copy of this triangle.
| | 03:17 | Now, I'll take my Rectangle tool and draw a
rectangle that's the same height as the triangle.
| | 03:23 | I'll press I on my keyboard to get my
Eyedropper tool and click on one of the
| | 03:28 | triangles to borrow their formatting.
| | 03:29 | Then I'll press V to get back to
my Selection tool and deselect.
| | 03:33 | That looks pretty good.
| | 03:35 | I'll select those two objects and group
them, and this is going to be my button
| | 03:39 | to go to the last page of the document.
| | 03:41 | I'll Shift+Click to select both
the group and the original triangle.
| | 03:45 | I'll go up to the control panel and
select one of the left-side reference points,
| | 03:50 | and then I'll hold Option or Alt and
click on Flip Horizontal and then slide
| | 03:55 | these buttons over a little bit.
And there I have four objects that will become
| | 04:00 | my navigation buttons.
| | 04:01 | They are not really buttons yet,
because I haven't assigned any actions in the
| | 04:05 | Buttons and Forms panel.
| | 04:06 | That's what we will do next.
| | 04:10 | So I will select my first triangle,
open the Buttons and Forms panel,
| | 04:14 | I'll click at the bottom of the panel
to convert it to a button, and the first
| | 04:19 | thing I'll do is give it a name.
| | 04:20 | It's important to name your
buttons to keep them organized.
| | 04:23 | This one I'll call Next Page.
| | 04:27 | For the Event, I'll choose On Release or
Tap and for the Action, Go To Next Page.
| | 04:33 | I also want this button to change
its appearance when I mouse over it,
| | 04:36 | so I am going to give it a rollover state.
| | 04:39 | I'll just click on Rollover and then
I'll go up to the control panel and change
| | 04:42 | the Fill from 50% Black to Paper.
| | 04:44 | Then I'll click back on Normal to
reset this button to the Normal state.
| | 04:50 | Now let's make the other buttons.
| | 04:51 | I'll click on the group on the right,
convert it to a button, give it a name.
| | 04:57 | This on, I'll call Last Page. The Event is On
Release or Tap and the Action, Go To Last Page.
| | 05:06 | We'll also give it the same rollover
state and reset it to the normal state.
| | 05:13 | Now let's do this one.
| | 05:15 | Convert it to a button, give it a name,
Previous Page, On Release or Tap, Go To
| | 05:23 | Previous Page, Rollover state, filled
with Paper, and reset it back to Normal. And
| | 05:32 | the last one, this one we'll take a
shortcut. We will just click on the plus
| | 05:36 | sign and choose Go To First Page.
We will name it First Page and give it the
| | 05:43 | Rollover state. And there I have my four buttons.
| | 05:51 | Now let's preview the rollover states.
| | 05:53 | I'll press Command+Shift+Return and
mouse over and I can see each of the buttons
| | 05:59 | changes their appearance.
| | 06:00 | But I can't use them to navigate
to different pages yet because this
| | 06:03 | document only has one page.
So let's add some pages.
| | 06:06 | I'll go the Pages panel, jump to page 1, and
let's add a few more pages, until we have 10 in all.
| | 06:17 | I will zoom out and I'll jump to my
Navigation master page, and I am going to
| | 06:23 | take my Type tool and drag out a really
big text frame; it fills the entire page.
| | 06:27 | I am going to make sure it's on the text layer.
| | 06:31 | So I will go to the Layers panel and
drag this square down to the text layer.
| | 06:35 | I will double-click to
get my cursor in the frame.
| | 06:39 | I will right-click and choose Insert
Special Character > Markers > Current Page Number.
| | 06:45 | I want to make this really big so I
will select it, and up in the control panel,
| | 06:50 | I will make the Type size 800
points, and I will center it in the frame.
| | 06:54 | I will go back to my Pages panel,
jump to the first page, and I can see that
| | 06:59 | automatic page number.
| | 07:01 | Now let's preview the navigation buttons.
| | 07:02 | I will press Command+Shift+Option+Return on
the Mac or Ctrl+Shift+Alt+Enter on the PC.
| | 07:07 | This will preview the whole document.
| | 07:10 | My rollover states are working, and now
I'll navigate to the different pages.
| | 07:16 | I can jump to the last page, page 10; the
first page, page 1; or any page in between.
| | 07:22 | I will close the SWF Preview panel.
And I want to do a little clean up work here.
| | 07:30 | I will press V on my keyboard to get
my Selection tool and because I am on
| | 07:33 | page 1, I don't actually need to Go To First
Page or Go To Previous Page buttons on here.
| | 07:38 | They don't really do anything,
so it doesn't make sense to have them here.
| | 07:41 | So I want to get rid of them.
| | 07:43 | I am going to Command+Shift+Click, or
Ctrl+Shift+Click on the PC, on each of
| | 07:46 | these items to override them from the master
page and then press Delete to get rid of them.
| | 07:52 | So now I only have the
buttons to go ahead in the document.
| | 07:55 | I am also going to do the same at the end.
| | 07:57 | I'll jump to page 10. And in this case,
I don't need the Go To Next Page or Go To Last Page buttons.
| | 08:03 | So again I will Command+Shift+Click
or Ctrl+Shift+Click and delete them.
| | 08:08 | Let's preview again.
| | 08:11 | Now when I preview my first page, I
only have that buttons that make sense here.
| | 08:16 | And the same thing for the last page.
| | 08:20 | So far we've seen the right settings
to create our presentation files, how
| | 08:23 | to structure them properly with layers, and
how to add navigation controls with buttons.
| | 08:28 | Next, we'll start actually adding
the content of our presentation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a title and content slides | 00:00 | To create a consistent look for our
presentation and to build up different slide
| | 00:04 | types quickly, the best tool
for the job is master pages.
| | 00:07 | We can start with a foundation that
includes just navigation elements and then
| | 00:11 | create variations for our
title and content slides.
| | 00:14 | For this job, we want to
create two new master pages:
| | 00:17 | one really simple design for the title
and end slides and one that can be the
| | 00:21 | basis for the rest of the
slides in the presentation.
| | 00:23 | So we will start in the Pages panel.
| | 00:25 | I'll go up to the Master Pages area
and right-click and choose New Master, and
| | 00:31 | I'll give it a Prefix of T and a Name of Title.
| | 00:34 | I will base it on the N-Nav master and click OK.
| | 00:39 | Now I want to add a
background image for some texture.
| | 00:42 | So I will go to my Layers panel,
target the Background layer, press Command+D
| | 00:46 | or Ctrl+D, I will navigate to my Links
folder, and scroll down and select texture.psd.
| | 00:54 | I'll click Open and click to place the graphic.
| | 00:58 | I will drag it over to center it a little
bit. And this is a little too dark for my taste,
| | 01:03 | so I want to lighten it a bit.
| | 01:06 | I will go up the Control panel and
select the Opacity controls and decrease the
| | 01:10 | Opacity of the graphic to 30%.
That's a little better.
| | 01:14 | I actually don't want this huge page
number on the title and end slides and nor
| | 01:18 | do I want it on my Nav master either.
| | 01:20 | That page should only
contain navigation elements.
| | 01:22 | So in the Pages panel, I'll double-
click on the Nav master, select the
| | 01:26 | text frame, and cut it.
| | 01:29 | Now I need to create the content
master, and remember, we have that big page
| | 01:32 | number in the clipboard.
| | 01:34 | So again, I'll right-click in the
Pages area, select New Master, and this one
| | 01:38 | I'll call C, Content.
| | 01:43 | And I'll base it on the
Title master. I'll click OK.
| | 01:47 | Now we get that background image, because
I based it on the Title master. And I do
| | 01:51 | want the giant page number on the
content slides because for this presentation,
| | 01:55 | I have eight slides for the 8 reasons
to study at Roux Academy and I don't want
| | 01:59 | to type out those numbers when I can
have InDesign do it for me so easily.
| | 02:03 | So to paste the page number in the
same location as before, I'll target the
| | 02:07 | Background layer and
choose Edit > Paste in Place.
| | 02:11 | Now I would like to change the font.
| | 02:13 | So with the frame still selected,
I'll go to my Type tool and change from Minion
| | 02:17 | Pro to Adobe Garamond Pro. And I want
this even bigger, so the top and the bottom
| | 02:24 | of the numbers get cropped off.
| | 02:26 | I am going to go all the way to 1200 point type.
| | 02:29 | I will zoom out and make the
frame larger so I can see it.
| | 02:34 | Try to center it a little bit.
| | 02:40 | The next thing I want to do is make
these page numbers very subtle since
| | 02:44 | otherwise their sheer size would
overwhelm everything on the page.
| | 02:46 | I'll reduced the Tint to 25% Black by
going to my Swatches panel, selecting
| | 02:51 | Formatting affects text and Tint of 25%.
And I also want the numbers to blend
| | 02:58 | into the background texture.
| | 02:59 | So I will switch to Formatting
affects container and then I can go up to my
| | 03:03 | control panel and change
the Opacity down to about 25%.
| | 03:08 | Now, let's apply the masters we
created to our document pages.
| | 03:12 | First, I will do the title and end slides.
| | 03:14 | So I will go back to the Pages panel, I will
right-click, and choose View Pages > Horizontally.
| | 03:19 | That way I can see more pages at once.
| | 03:21 | I'll Command+Click or Ctrl+Click on
the first and last pages and then I'll
| | 03:28 | Option+Click or Alt+Click on
the Title master to apply that.
| | 03:31 | Now I'll apply the Content
master to my other slides.
| | 03:33 | So I will select page 2 and Shift+Select page 9
| | 03:37 | so I have all those pages selected,
and I'll Option+Click or Alt+Click on
| | 03:42 | the Content master.
| | 03:43 | So, now I have all the right masters
applied, but I have a little problem.
| | 03:47 | If I go to page 2, I want the number
here to start at 1, since this is the first
| | 03:52 | reason to apply at the Roux Academy,
| | 03:54 | so I need to change the page numbering.
| | 03:57 | First of all, I am going to go to the
this little black triangle here over page
| | 04:01 | 1 and double-click it to open up my
Numbering & Section Options, and I am going
| | 04:06 | to change the Style from Arabic
to lowercase Roman and click OK.
| | 04:10 | I am going to right-click on the
second page and choose Numbering & Section
| | 04:14 | Options and I am going to have Start
Section selected, Start Page Numbering
| | 04:19 | at 1, Style Arabic.
| | 04:22 | I can't have two Arabic page number ones,
| | 04:24 | so that's why I had to create a
separate section for the Title and use
| | 04:28 | Roman numerals there.
| | 04:30 | I'll click OK and now we have
our numbering starting at 1.
| | 04:34 | Next, I want to add some placeholder elements
for the text and photos on my content slides.
| | 04:39 | I want three main
elements on each content slide:
| | 04:41 | some text on the left that says reason
number one, reason number two, and so on;
| | 04:45 | I want a text frame with the slide
title and supporting text in the middle; and
| | 04:50 | on the right side, I want a photo.
| | 04:51 | And furthermore, I want some branding and
contact info to go down here at the bottom.
| | 04:55 | So, I am going to go to my Content
master and to do all of this quicker, I did
| | 05:01 | some work ahead of time to create
styles to apply to the text in the objects.
| | 05:05 | If you need help understanding how to
create and edit styles, I recommend you
| | 05:09 | watch Michael Murphy's InDesign
Styles in Depth videos in the lynda.com
| | 05:13 | online training library.
| | 05:14 | So the first thing I will put on my
Content master is the text frame for the
| | 05:18 | smaller reason numbers here over on the left.
| | 05:21 | So I will go to my Layers panel.
| | 05:23 | I will make sure I have my Text layer selected.
| | 05:26 | I'll get my Type tool.
| | 05:27 | I will press the W key so I can see
all those columns I created, and I am
| | 05:32 | actually going to select the large
frame with the page number in it and lock it
| | 05:35 | by pressing Command+L or Ctrl+L,
just so it doesn't get in my way.
| | 05:39 | Now I'll draw the text
frame for the reason numbers.
| | 05:42 | I have it occupy two columns and I
will position it up a little bit higher,
| | 05:49 | at about 130 pixels.
| | 05:52 | Then I will double-click to
get my Type tool in there.
| | 05:55 | Let's zoom in and I'll type Reason
No., press Return, and then I'll press the
| | 06:05 | keyboard shortcut for the current page
number, which is Command+Shift+Option+N,
| | 06:09 | Ctrl+Shift+Alt+N. Now, I'll
apply those styles I created.
| | 06:12 | So I'll open Window > Styles >
Paragraph Styles, and apply Reason Sidehead Title
| | 06:23 | and Reason Sidehead Number.
| | 06:24 | And I'll zoom out a little. And next,
I want to create the main text frame.
| | 06:35 | I'll drag out a frame and
have it occupy six of my columns:
| | 06:38 | 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and all
the way down to the bottom.
| | 06:46 | I'll nudge it up a little bit, to about 250
pixels, and make it go all the way to the bottom.
| | 06:55 | I'll add some placeholder text.
| | 06:56 | I will just type in "Slide Title" and
"Slide Text" and apply a couple of styles, so
| | 07:06 | again, Window > Styles > Paragraph
Styles > Slide Title, and Slide Text.
| | 07:16 | Next, I want to add a photo frame over
here on the top right and I am going to
| | 07:19 | take my Rectangle Frame tool, click and
drag over five columns. And again, I have
| | 07:26 | a style that I can apply to it.
| | 07:28 | I'll pick the Object Style by going
Window > Styles > Object Styles, and this one
| | 07:34 | is called Picture. It gives the
frame a white fill and a drop shadow.
| | 07:41 | So far, we have got our
presentation file off to a great start.
| | 07:44 | We have it nicely structured with
master pages for Title and Content slides.
| | 07:48 | And what we need to do next is place
the photos and text on our Content slides,
| | 07:52 | add some branding and contact info,
and work on our title and end slides.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Overriding master page items | 00:00 | So far, we've built a solid
foundation for our presentation document with
| | 00:03 | placeholder items organized onto master
pages and layers and we have styles in
| | 00:07 | our document ready to apply to text and objects.
| | 00:10 | So now it's time for the actual
content to be placed on the pages, and for
| | 00:13 | that we need to override the master
page items we carefully created so we can
| | 00:18 | make each page unique.
| | 00:19 | So here on my first content page I
see my placeholder items and if I try to
| | 00:23 | click on them, I can't.
| | 00:25 | It's like they're locked.
| | 00:26 | Well, they are not actually locked;
| | 00:28 | they are just master page items.
| | 00:29 | Until I tell InDesign that I want to
override them on this document page, they
| | 00:33 | are unavailable to edit from here.
| | 00:35 | The keyboard shortcut to override a
master page item on a document page is
| | 00:39 | Command+Shift+Click on the Mac
or Ctrl+Shift+Click on the PC.
| | 00:42 | So I'll do that for the text frame and I
can see its appearance changes, and now
| | 00:46 | I can select the text within
it and edit it if I want to.
| | 00:50 | And this is great if I want to write
the content directly into each slide.
| | 00:54 | But in this case I have all the text already
written for me in Microsoft Word documents.
| | 00:58 | So I don't need to override these master
page items to place that text onto each page.
| | 01:03 | So I am going to actually undo and
go to my master page and clear out
| | 01:08 | the placeholder text.
| | 01:09 | I'll go back to page 1 and now let's
place the text into these text frames.
| | 01:17 | I'll press Command+D or Ctrl+D to
get the Place dialog box, and I have a
| | 01:21 | series of RTF files.
| | 01:23 | I'll select them, click Open, and now
I can click on each one of those frames
| | 01:30 | to place the text.
| | 01:32 | Now there is no styling information in
those RTF files, but I have paragraph
| | 01:36 | styles I can apply in
InDesign to format this text.
| | 01:39 | So I'll choose Window >
Styles > Paragraph Styles.
| | 01:45 | I'll select the first paragraph and
apply Slide Title, put my cursor in the next
| | 01:50 | paragraph and apply Slide Text.
| | 01:52 | And in fact that pattern holds
true for all these RTF files.
| | 01:55 | There's one paragraph of Slide Title
followed by one or more paragraphs of Slide Text.
| | 02:01 | So I can take advantage of a little shortcut
to apply the styles on the rest of my slides.
| | 02:05 | I'll go to page 2 and I'll actually
take a look at the definition of the Slide
| | 02:11 | Title paragraph style.
| | 02:12 | I'll right-click on it
and choose Edit Slide Title.
| | 02:16 | And I can see that it was set up with this
option, Next Style, and it shows Slide Text.
| | 02:21 | So in each case, I know that Slide
Text is going to follow the Slide Title.
| | 02:28 | So I'll select both paragraphs, and
then the trick is to select the first
| | 02:32 | paragraph style and right-click on it and
choose Apply Slide Title, then Next Style.
| | 02:39 | And it applies the first paragraph
style and the next style all at once.
| | 02:43 | Let's do that for the rest of the frames:
| | 02:45 | select both paragraphs, right-click,
Apply Slide Title, then Next Style.
| | 02:53 | And there we have all our
titles and slide text formatted.
| | 02:56 | Now let's places the photos.
| | 02:57 | I'll go back to page 1, close my
Paragraph and Character Styles and I'll press
| | 03:03 | Command+D or Ctrl+D again to get the
Place dialog box, and this time I'll select
| | 03:07 | all of my JPEG images.
| | 03:13 | I'll click over the picture frame to place them.
| | 03:17 | And in some cases, I might need to
go back and do a little adjustment.
| | 03:21 | I'll double-click and recrop this
so it makes a little more sense.
| | 03:27 | The last thing I want to do is add some
contact information and some branding in
| | 03:31 | the form of a Roux Academy logo
in the bottom-left of the slides.
| | 03:35 | To save time I've created what I want
in another document and exported the logo
| | 03:39 | and the contact info from that
document as an InDesign snippet.
| | 03:43 | If you've never used InDesign snippets
before, you really should give them a try.
| | 03:46 | Snippets are little stand-alone files
of InDesign objects that you can save,
| | 03:50 | share, and place into your documents.
| | 03:52 | The file format is text-based, so the
file sizes are tiny and you can easily
| | 03:56 | email them to your coworkers.
| | 03:58 | So, on my Pages panel, I'll go to the
Nav master, because I want this contact
| | 04:03 | information to appear always.
| | 04:05 | I'll press Command+D or Ctrl+D and in
my Links folder, I'll scroll down and
| | 04:13 | choose RouxInfo.idms, and click Open.
| | 04:17 | I have the snippet at my cursor and
if I hold down Option or Alt, my cursor
| | 04:21 | changes and I can have the snippet be
placed at its original location, the
| | 04:25 | location it was at in the
document that I exported it from.
| | 04:28 | I want to use that here, because in
the original document, the snippet was at
| | 04:32 | the exact spot where I
want it in this document too.
| | 04:35 | So again, I'll hold Option or Alt and
click, and it goes right to the right
| | 04:40 | spot, down in the bottom-left corner.
| | 04:42 | Now I can check that on
my slides, and there it is.
| | 04:46 | I also created snippets of the content that
I want on the first slide and the last slide.
| | 04:51 | Let's navigate to the first page by
double-clicking on it, and I'll press
| | 04:54 | Command+D or Ctrl+D to get the Place dialog box.
| | 04:57 | And in the Links folder, I'll
scroll down until I find the snippet
| | 05:02 | called RouxStart.idms. I'll click Open.
| | 05:06 | And I am going to hold down the Option
or Alt key on my keyboard to place this
| | 05:11 | at the same location as the original document.
| | 05:13 | This is a great way to reuse content
where you know it's going to appear in the
| | 05:18 | same place in all your documents.
| | 05:20 | So there's my title slide.
| | 05:22 | I'll double-click on page 9 and again
press Command+D, scroll down in the Links
| | 05:29 | folder and choose RouxEnd.idms.
| | 05:33 | I'll hold Option or Alt and click and
now I have the content for my end slide.
| | 05:41 | Master pages are great for allowing us
to quickly build our documents out of
| | 05:43 | consistent elements.
| | 05:44 | When it comes time to place unique
content into your document pages, you need to
| | 05:49 | either override master page items or
use the Place command to place text and
| | 05:52 | photos into those frames.
| | 05:54 | And don't forget that saving common
elements as snippets can make them
| | 05:57 | very handy to reuse.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting page transitions | 00:00 | When you're viewing interactive
documents exported from InDesign, the change
| | 00:04 | from one page to the next
is instantaneous by default.
| | 00:07 | In many cases, this'll be fine, but for
a presentation, especially one that's
| | 00:11 | being viewed in Full Screen mode,
that change can seem pretty abrupt.
| | 00:14 | You can smooth the change from one
page to the next by adding special effects
| | 00:18 | called page transitions.
| | 00:19 | There are two places where you can add
page transitions to your document: the
| | 00:23 | Pages panel and the Page Transitions panel.
| | 00:26 | In the Pages panel, I'll right-click
on one of the pages and choose Page
| | 00:31 | Attributes > Page Transitions > Choose.
| | 00:36 | I could also get the same
choice in the Pages Panel menu.
| | 00:39 | This opens the Page Transitions dialog
box, where I can see 12 different types
| | 00:43 | of page transitions, and if I mouse
over any one of them, I get a generic
| | 00:46 | preview of the effect.
| | 00:48 | When I find one I like
I can click to select it.
| | 00:51 | I'll choose Fade. And by default
Apply to All Spreads is selected.
| | 00:56 | So I'll get the same
transition applied after each page.
| | 01:00 | If I wanted to have different
transitions or no transition after certain pages,
| | 01:03 | I deselect this option.
| | 01:06 | Since I want to show several different
transitions in the file I export from
| | 01:09 | this document, I'll uncheck
Apply to All Spreads and click OK.
| | 01:13 | Now I can see in the Pages panel a
small icon to the right of the page I had
| | 01:16 | selected, indicating that a page
transition has been applied there.
| | 01:21 | If I right-click on that icon, I can
get a menu or I can reopen the dialog box
| | 01:25 | to choose a different transition.
| | 01:26 | I can edit the attributes of the
transition or clear it altogether.
| | 01:30 | Let's edit this one.
| | 01:33 | Choosing Edit opens the Page Transitions panel.
| | 01:35 | I could also open it from Window >
Interactive > Page Transitions.
| | 01:39 | Here I have a menu to
choose a different transition.
| | 01:42 | So if I wanted to change from Fade
to Push, I could choose that here, and I
| | 01:46 | can mouse over the area at the
top of the panel to get a preview.
| | 01:49 | For some of the transitions I can also
edit the attributes of Direction and Speed.
| | 01:53 | So for the Push transition I can
pick a direction the pages will move in.
| | 01:58 | I can pick from any side or corner,
and I can preview that in the menu above.
| | 02:01 | So if I want the pages to push offscreen,
down, and left, I can choose Left Down.
| | 02:09 | I can also choose the
speed: Slow, Medium, or Fast.
| | 02:12 | If I like the transition and I want to
apply it to the whole document, I can
| | 02:16 | click the button at the bottom of
the panel to apply it to all spreads.
| | 02:19 | The Page Transitions panel also has a
menu where you can select Choose to get
| | 02:22 | the dialog box where you can
compare all the different transitions.
| | 02:28 | And the menu also has choices to apply
to all spreads and clear all transitions.
| | 02:33 | Let's apply different transitions
after each page in this document, just to
| | 02:36 | compare them, and then preview
them in the SWF Preview panel.
| | 02:41 | I'll make both my Pages and my
Page Transitions panel visible.
| | 02:47 | I'll select each page one by one
and then select the transition for it.
| | 02:50 | I'm going to skip the Page Turn
transition since that's the SWF Only choice.
| | 02:58 | In order to get that effect where the
viewer can drag a corner of a page and
| | 03:01 | turn it like a sheet of paper, you'd
have to export to a SWF and if you want
| | 03:05 | that in your PDF, you have to export to
SWF and then place it back into the PDF,
| | 03:10 | as we'll see in the later movie.
But for now I'll skip this one.
| | 03:14 | Now to preview them. I'll press
Command+Shift+Option+Return or
| | 03:17 | Ctrl+Shift+Alt+Enter on the PC to
open the SWF Preview panel and put it in
| | 03:21 | Preview Document mode.
| | 03:25 | When the preview is ready, I can use
my navigation buttons to go through the
| | 03:29 | document and see those transitions.
| | 03:35 | Now let's export to interactive
PDF and see our transitions there.
| | 03:39 | I'll press Command+E or Ctrl+E,
export to the desktop, Format Adobe PDF
| | 03:45 | (Interactive), and click Save.
| | 03:48 | In the dialog box, I have the option to
make the PDF open in Full Screen mode.
| | 03:52 | Transitions will only be visible in my
PDF if I'm viewing in Full Screen mode,
| | 03:56 | so I'll select that.
| | 03:57 | I also have a Page Transitions menu
here where I can choose From Document, no
| | 04:02 | transitions at all, or override what
I had in the document and pick one
| | 04:06 | transition for all pages.
| | 04:07 | I leave it on From Document and click OK.
| | 04:14 | When Adobe Acrobat opens, it warns me
that the document is trying to open
| | 04:18 | in Full Screen mode.
| | 04:19 | I am going to allow that. And now I can use my
navigation buttons and see those transitions.
| | 04:26 | With page transitions you can move
smoothly through a presentation and
| | 04:30 | control both the effect shown in
between pages and the timing of it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating hyperlinks | 00:00 | Hyperlinks are one of the most
fundamental features of interactive documents.
| | 00:04 | You can use them to jump to specific
pages or places within the document or to
| | 00:08 | web pages or other
destinations outside your document.
| | 00:11 | It's hard to imagine an interactive
document without at least a few hyperlinks in it,
| | 00:15 | so let's see how they work.
| | 00:17 | At the bottom of my content pages, I
have this information down here on the
| | 00:20 | left-hand side, and I'd like to make
that a clickable hyperlink that goes to the
| | 00:24 | Roux Academy web site.
| | 00:26 | So I will double-click on N-Nav master to
go to that master page and then I can
| | 00:31 | select this little group of items here.
| | 00:33 | I will go to my Hyperlinks panel and
in the URL field, I will click and I'll
| | 00:38 | type in the address, rouxacademy.com,
and hit Enter or Return.
| | 00:44 | And you can see there is one little
drawback to this method: that I didn't get a
| | 00:48 | chance to name the hyperlink;
it's just called this generic Hyperlink.
| | 00:52 | Although if I do mouse
over it, I can see the address.
| | 00:55 | To test this hyperlink, I can go down to
the bottom of the panel and click on Go
| | 00:58 | to destination and it opens the
Roux Academy web site in my browser.
| | 01:05 | I also want to make a hyperlink
on the last page of the document,
| | 01:08 | so I will navigate there. And in this
case, I would like this text right at the
| | 01:13 | bottom, www.rouxacademy.com, to be a hyperlink.
| | 01:17 | So I will select that text, I will go
back to the Hyperlinks Panel menu, and
| | 01:24 | choose New Hyperlink from URL. And this
time it named it according to the text
| | 01:28 | that I had selected.
| | 01:30 | I can preview this in the SWF Preview
panel. I will press Command+Shift+Return
| | 01:34 | or Ctrl+Shift+Enter on the
PC and click on that text.
| | 01:38 | And again, it opens in my web browser.
| | 01:40 | I will close the SWF Preview panel,
go back to my Hyperlinks panel, and I
| | 01:47 | will actually trash this hyperlink because
I want to show another method for making it.
| | 01:51 | I will click in a text frame
and in the Hyperlinks Panel menu,
| | 01:55 | I will choose Convert URLs to Hyperlinks.
| | 01:58 | Now here I have a dialog box that's
somewhat like InDesign's Find/Change dialog box.
| | 02:03 | I can tell InDesign to search for
whatever it thinks is a hyperlink throughout
| | 02:06 | the document and create it.
| | 02:08 | So first of all, I can set the Scope. I
can search either the entire document
| | 02:12 | or the current story.
| | 02:13 | If I had a selection of
text, I could also search that.
| | 02:18 | For this, I will choose Story.
| | 02:20 | I can also apply a character style to
the hyperlink, and for now I'll just choose
| | 02:24 | Find. And you can see that it went down
and found what it thinks is a hyperlink.
| | 02:29 | I will click on Convert and Done, and
again you can see that it didn't give it a
| | 02:35 | descriptive name, but I can still
mouse over it to see that it worked.
| | 02:38 | Another thing to be aware of when
you use this method is that this isn't
| | 02:41 | particularly intelligent.
| | 02:43 | It doesn't distinguish between a real,
valid URL and any range of text containing
| | 02:48 | a period and no spaces.
| | 02:50 | So if click off and show my pasteboard,
I can see over here I just have picture.jpg.
| | 02:57 | Let's use the same feature, Convert
URLs to Hyperlinks, search the story, Find,
| | 03:04 | and you can see InDesign
highlighted this text, and we will say Convert.
| | 03:10 | And sure enough, it tried to make a
hyperlink to a URL called picture.jpg, which
| | 03:15 | of course isn't really a valid URL.
| | 03:18 | This could cause you particular
problems if you had selected to apply a
| | 03:21 | character style to every URL that was found.
| | 03:23 | So as we have seen here, there a
lot of ways to add hyperlinks to your interactive documents.
| | 03:28 | Some methods are quick and easy but
don't give you very descriptive names for
| | 03:31 | keeping your hyperlinks organized.
| | 03:33 | Other methods take a little
more time but keep things tidy.
| | 03:36 | So experiment with the different ways
and see which best fits your workflow.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the slug for notes | 00:00 | Adding an area to your presentation
documents for Notes is easy and it can be a
| | 00:05 | real convenience for the person
presenting the slides and the audience.
| | 00:08 | So let's go ahead and out of
place for notes to our file.
| | 00:11 | When I first created this presentation
document I included a large 300-pixel-
| | 00:15 | wide slug area on the right-hand side,
| | 00:18 | and the reason I did that was to give me
a space where I could include notes for
| | 00:21 | both myself and my audience, if
they want to print pages out.
| | 00:25 | Now let's set up that notes area.
| | 00:27 | The first thing I need to do is to
go to my Layers panel and add two more
| | 00:31 | layers to this document.
| | 00:32 | So I'll Option+Click or Alt+Click on the
New Layer button, and the first one I'll
| | 00:36 | call Presenter Notes. Click OK, and again
Option+Click or Alt+Click, and I'll call
| | 00:44 | this one Audience Notes.
| | 00:48 | I'll move these to the top so they are
above the Navigation layer, and I'll go to
| | 00:52 | my Pages panel and double-click on N-
Nav to go to my navigation master page.
| | 00:56 | I'll slide this over and I'll press
the W key on my keyboard to get out of
| | 01:01 | Preview mode so you can see that slug area.
| | 01:04 | What I want to do here is add a
text frame on both of the new layers.
| | 01:07 | So first, I'll do the Audience Notes.
| | 01:10 | Go to my Layers panel, make sure I'm
targeting the Audience Notes layer,
| | 01:14 | press the T key on the keyboard to get my
Type tool, and click and drag out a text frame.
| | 01:20 | Make sure it fits inside that slug
area, and I'll just press the Return key on
| | 01:24 | my keyboard a bunch of times
to create several paragraphs.
| | 01:27 | I'll press Command+A or Ctrl+A to
select all those paragraphs and from the
| | 01:32 | control panel menu, I'll choose Paragraph
Rules and I'll turn on Rule Below. I'll
| | 01:40 | preview and there they are. I'll click OK.
| | 01:43 | Now I want to spread these out a little
bit more to just give people more room
| | 01:48 | in between each line to write.
| | 01:49 | So I'll go to the Paragraph Controls
in the control panel and I'll add more
| | 01:53 | space after until it looks right.
| | 01:56 | That's pretty good, and deselect.
| | 01:59 | Now I'll go back to the Layers
panel and hide the Audience Notes layer.
| | 02:05 | And I'll work on the Presenter Notes
now. Still with my Type tool, I'll click
| | 02:09 | and drag a new text frame.
| | 02:11 | And in this case I've prepared an
object style ahead of time that will format
| | 02:14 | the text frame and the
text the way that I want it.
| | 02:17 | So I'll open my object styles by
choosing Window > Styles > Object Styles.
| | 02:22 | I'll select the frame with my Selection tool
and also at the Presenter Note object style.
| | 02:28 | This object style will apply paragraph
style, also called Presenter Notes, that'll
| | 02:32 | make the text large, so I can read it at
a distance and it puts rules above and
| | 02:36 | below each paragraph to
set my notes apart from each other.
| | 02:39 | If you're not familiar with setting
up object styles, please see Michael
| | 02:42 | Murphy's InDesign Styles in Depth in
the lynda.com online training library.
| | 02:48 | I'm not going to add any text here
since I'm still on the master page, and that
| | 02:51 | would make the text
appear in every presenter note.
| | 02:54 | So I'll navigate to the first page of
my document and I can see my presenter
| | 02:58 | note, but I can't type in it now,
because it's a master page item.
| | 03:02 | So I need to overwrite it.
| | 03:03 | I'll press Command+Shift or
Ctrl+Shift on the PC and click on it. And I
| | 03:08 | can double-click to enter my cursor in the
frame, and I can just type a note myself.
| | 03:12 | And you can see the text is nice and
big and it's set off, so if I hit a
| | 03:17 | paragraph return, I start entering another note.
| | 03:21 | Now the purpose of these notes is to
be used in a printout of the slides,
| | 03:24 | so let's see how to print them out.
| | 03:26 | Before I print the document, I need
to set up the correct visibility of the
| | 03:29 | layers. So if I wanted to print out
the Presenter Notes, I'd have to go to my
| | 03:32 | Layers panel and make sure that
the Presenter Notes was visible.
| | 03:36 | And if I wanted to print out the
Audience Notes, I'd have to make them visible
| | 03:39 | and hide the Presenter Notes.
| | 03:41 | So in this case I'll print the
Presenter Notes, I'll press Command+P or
| | 03:45 | Ctrl+P to bring up the Print dialog
box and I'll go to Setup, choose Scale To
| | 03:50 | Fit, and in Marks and Bleed
I'll choose Include Slug Area.
| | 03:56 | And now I can see from the preview here that
the slug area will be included in the printout.
| | 04:00 | I'll go back to Setup, and one thing to
watch out for here is when you include
| | 04:05 | the slug area, everything has to be
scaled down pretty far to fit everything on
| | 04:09 | a letter-sized page.
I am actually below 50% scaling right here.
| | 04:13 | So if that's a problem, you can decrease
the width of your slug area or just use
| | 04:17 | a bigger size paper for your printouts.
| | 04:19 | In any case, it's worth doing some test
printouts, especially with your audience
| | 04:22 | notes, because you don't want to print
out hundreds of pages and then realize
| | 04:26 | that the write-on lines are
too small for people to use.
| | 04:29 | But with a little care and testing,
you should be able to get a good-looking
| | 04:32 | printout with a Notes area.
| | 04:33 | Adding presenter or audience notes to
your presentation files is an easy way to
| | 04:37 | make your slides more usable for you
and more handy for your audience. It can
| | 04:41 | help create a more successful
presentation for everyone involved.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Building an Interactive PDF CatalogUnderstanding what we're going to build | 00:00 | In this chapter we're going to continue
our look at interactivity that you can
| | 00:03 | create in InDesign and output to PDF.
| | 00:07 | We'll start by building an
interactive table of contents that appears just
| | 00:10 | when you want it, and it allows you to navigate
to any page from any page in your document.
| | 00:14 | Then we will see how to build the
navigation system that you can roll over to see
| | 00:19 | a thumbnail preview of a page and then go to it.
| | 00:26 | We'll also look at some of the button
functions that work only in PDF export,
| | 00:30 | things like the View Zoom and Print.
| | 00:35 | And because sometimes you need to
combine the functionality of SWF and PDF,
| | 00:39 | we'll also look at combining buttons
and multi-state objects to get a SWF slide-
| | 00:43 | show working and looking great in a PDF.
| | 00:46 | We'll also look at a few aspects of
working with videos, including placing a
| | 00:49 | video from a file, placing a video from
URL, and setting navigation points that
| | 00:54 | allow you to click to jump
to any point in the video.
| | 00:57 | (music playing)
| | 01:03 | And finally, we'll take a look at the
pluses and minuses of having InDesign make
| | 01:07 | hyperlinks automatically
from URLs in your documents.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Building an interactive table of contents | 00:00 | One of the best things about
interactive documents is that you can make objects
| | 00:04 | appear exactly when and where they're
most useful and you can make them go away
| | 00:08 | when they're not needed anymore.
| | 00:10 | For example, you can build the table
of contents that can we used to navigate
| | 00:13 | directly from any page to any page,
and you can make it so this object stays
| | 00:18 | hidden until someone wants to use it.
| | 00:20 | It takes a little bit of effort,
but it's a really nice feature for
| | 00:22 | your documents to have,
so let's see how to make it.
| | 00:26 | My document here is a course
catalog for the Roux Academy.
| | 00:29 | It contains descriptions of the
courses and a form to register for those
| | 00:32 | courses at the end.
| | 00:34 | And if I look at page 3, I have the
standard table of contents, which I could
| | 00:38 | create with hyperlinks to the
description of each course in the catalog, but in
| | 00:42 | addition to that, we can also create
something that looks like this that can
| | 00:46 | appear on every page, just when people want it.
| | 00:49 | The first thing we need to do is to
create the destinations that each table of
| | 00:52 | contents entry will lead to when it's clicked.
| | 00:55 | Let's go to page 5 and set up some destinations.
| | 00:59 | I'll double-click on the text frame
to get my Type tool and I'll drag over
| | 01:03 | the first course name.
| | 01:04 | I'll go to my Hyperlinks panel and from
the Panel menu, I'll choose New Hyperlink
| | 01:10 | Destination, and it becomes a
text anchor named for the course.
| | 01:15 | I'll click OK and repeat: New Hyperlink
Destination, OK, and for the third one.
| | 01:29 | Now I want my table of contents to
appear on whatever page I happen to be on
| | 01:33 | when I click this Contents
button down at the bottom of the page.
| | 01:36 | So for that, I need to build it on
the master page, so I'll go to my Pages
| | 01:40 | panel, double-click on A-Master to show it, and
I've already started to work on it a little bit.
| | 01:46 | I'll show my Layers panel, and I created a
separate layer for this called Pop-up TOC.
| | 01:51 | I'll show that, and you
can see what I've built here.
| | 01:54 | Basically, I copied the table of
contents from page 3 and I cut each of the
| | 01:59 | course names out and put them in their
own separate text frame. That's because
| | 02:03 | everything you see here is going to
become an individual button. Wherever I want
| | 02:07 | to click to go to an individual
course, that needs to be a button.
| | 02:10 | And I also created this little
close button element up here.
| | 02:14 | Now let's make the buttons
for the three courses on page 5.
| | 02:17 | I'll select the first text frame,
Designing a Basic Digital Character1, and in
| | 02:22 | fact, I'll double-click and
select a course name again.
| | 02:25 | I'll copy it and press Escape to select the frame.
| | 02:29 | I'll go to my Buttons and Forms panel.
| | 02:33 | I'll click on the plus button next
Actions and I'll choose Go To Destination.
| | 02:39 | I'll select Name and paste in
that name that I just copied.
| | 02:42 | The Event will be On Release or Tap,
Go To Destination, and then I'll choose
| | 02:47 | the right destination.
| | 02:48 | I'll also choose Hidden Until Triggered.
| | 02:51 | I'll repeat that process for the other courses.
| | 02:56 | Copy the name, select the frame,
make it into a button that goes to that
| | 03:02 | destination, paste in the name and
select the destination, and make sure it's
| | 03:10 | hidden until we trigger it.
And repeat one more time.
| | 03:14 | All right, those buttons are set up.
| | 03:16 | Now let's set up the close button.
I'm going to select this, go to my Buttons and
| | 03:21 | Forms and add an action:
Show/Hide Buttons and Forms.
| | 03:25 | I'm going to name this button Close TOC.
| | 03:31 | I'll deselect and reselect so
I see that name in the panel.
| | 03:35 | And now what I want this button to do
is to hide this entire table of contents,
| | 03:38 | so all these buttons have to be
hidden when this button is clicked.
| | 03:43 | So the event is On Release or Tap, the
action Show/Hide Buttons and Forms, and in
| | 03:47 | Visibility I need to select all
the buttons that make up this TOC.
| | 03:51 | So I'll select Close TOC and scroll all
the way up and make sure I have all of
| | 03:56 | them selected, and then I'll click Hide.
| | 04:00 | I'll also make sure that this
button is hidden until it's triggered.
| | 04:03 | Now I need to do a similar thing for
the buttons that make up the course names.
| | 04:08 | When they're clicked, I need to make
them hide the table of contents as well.
| | 04:11 | So I'll add a second action, Show/
Hide Buttons and Forms. And fortunately
| | 04:17 | for me, all the same buttons are still
selected in the Visibility menu, so I
| | 04:21 | can just click Hide. I'll repeat.
| | 04:25 | Lastly, I need to make this Contents
button show the entire table of contents,
| | 04:30 | so I need to pick the new buttons
that I just created and make the
| | 04:33 | Contents button show them.
| | 04:36 | Now we're ready to preview.
| | 04:38 | I'll press Command+Shift+Option+Return
or Ctrl+Shift+Alt on the PC to preview
| | 04:42 | the entire document in the SWF Preview panel.
| | 04:46 | I'll click the Contents button and the
table of contents appears. Let's jump to
| | 04:50 | Page 5 and there we go.
| | 04:53 | It took some setup work, but in return
we got a really convenient table of
| | 04:56 | contents element that lets us go
directly to any page, from any page, by creating
| | 05:01 | destinations first, then creating
buttons that go to those destinations and
| | 05:05 | hide the entire table of contents.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Building a navigation system | 00:00 | So far, we have seen a couple of
different ways of adding navigation controls
| | 00:04 | to our documents, things like hyperlinks and
buttons to make clickable table of contents.
| | 00:08 | Another kind of navigation system is
one that uses buttons with rollover
| | 00:12 | states that give the user a thumbnail
preview of the page they'll go to if
| | 00:16 | they click the button.
| | 00:17 | So let's make some of those.
| | 00:18 | I have set up each page of this
document with two small picture frames near
| | 00:22 | the sides and the bottom, plus triangles that
look like arrows pointing forward and back.
| | 00:28 | What I am gong to do is convert these
objects to buttons and then give the
| | 00:31 | triangle buttons three separate actions:
| | 00:34 | one to navigate to either the next or
previous page, one to show a thumbnail
| | 00:38 | preview of that page when I roll over
the triangle, and one to hide the thumbnail
| | 00:43 | when I roll off the triangle.
| | 00:44 | It might sound a little
complicated, but it's really not that hard.
| | 00:48 | I'll start by selecting all four objects.
| | 00:51 | I'll Shift+Click, I'll go to my Buttons
and Forms panel, and click to create buttons.
| | 00:58 | Since they weren't grouped, they
become four separate buttons.
| | 01:01 | Now I have named the buttons that
hold the thumbnail images of the pages.
| | 01:04 | So right now I am on page 2. So for the
button on the left, I'll call it Page 1
| | 01:10 | TN, TN being for thumbnail.
| | 01:13 | The Event will be On Release or Tap and
the Action will be Go To Previous Page.
| | 01:20 | I'll select the frame on the right, and
this will go to page 3, so I'll call it
| | 01:26 | Page 3 TN, On Release or Tap, Go To Next Page.
| | 01:32 | Now I'll place the
thumbnail images into these buttons.
| | 01:35 | I previously exported this document as
a PDF, and now I want to place the pages
| | 01:40 | of that PDF as my thumbnails.
| | 01:42 | So I'll choose File > Place or press
Command+D or Ctrl+D and in my Links folder
| | 01:47 | I'll scroll down until I
see Rouxinteractive.pdf.
| | 01:52 | I'll hold the Shift key and click Open.
That will give me my Import Options.
| | 01:57 | And in this case, I want Page
1 for the first thumbnail,
| | 02:00 | so I'll click OK and place it into that frame.
| | 02:06 | Now I'll select the other frame,
choose Place again, scroll down to
| | 02:11 | Rouxinteractive.pdf, I'll hold Shift and click
Open. And this thumbnail needs to go to Page 3.
| | 02:17 | So instead of the Previewed
Page, I just one go to Page 3.
| | 02:21 | I'll click on Range and enter 3.
| | 02:23 | So now I have my thumbnails in place.
| | 02:29 | I'll select both thumbnail buttons and make
sure that Hidden Until Triggered is selected.
| | 02:35 | I'll deselect and let's
work on the triangle buttons.
| | 02:38 | I'll select the one on the left. I'll
give it a name. I'll call it Go To Page 1,
| | 02:44 | On Release or Tap for the Event
and the Action, Go To Previous Page.
| | 02:53 | Now I'll choose another event--On
Rollover--I'll choose Show Hide Buttons, and
| | 02:58 | Forms and select my Page 1 Thumbnail button.
| | 03:02 | Then I'll choose On Roll Off, Show Hide
Buttons and Forms, and Hide the Page 1 Thumbnail.
| | 03:09 | And now let's select other triangle.
| | 03:12 | We will call it Go To Page 3, On Rollover,
Show Hide Buttons and Forms, Page 3 Thumbnail.
| | 03:24 | On Roll Off, Show Hide Buttons and
Forms and Hide the Page 3 Thumbnail, and
| | 03:30 | I'd repeat the process throughout the
document with all the page thumbnails
| | 03:34 | and all the arrow buttons.
| | 03:36 | Now let's preview the document.
| | 03:41 | I can roll over the triangle. It shows me
the preview of the next page. And I can
| | 03:45 | navigate through the document this way.
| | 03:48 | So this was a nice example of what
you can do when you assign multiple
| | 03:51 | actions to a button.
| | 03:53 | In this case, we assigned
three actions to a button:
| | 03:55 | one action showed an image
when we rolled over the button,
| | 03:58 | another action hid that image when we
rolled off, and the third action will let
| | 04:02 | navigate us to a different
page when we click the button.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating PDF-only buttons | 00:00 | One of the first things that's
important to learn when you start working with
| | 00:03 | buttons is that some button actions
only work with certain kinds of output.
| | 00:07 | In this movie we'll look at
actions that only work with PDF output.
| | 00:10 | Let's start by taking a look in the
Buttons and Forms panel in the Actions menu.
| | 00:14 | You have to select an object in your
document in order to see this menu.
| | 00:18 | We'll go to Buttons and Forms and click
on the plus sign to see the actions.
| | 00:23 | And I can see that this menu
is divided into three parts.
| | 00:27 | At the top are actions
that will work in any output.
| | 00:29 | So I have Go To Destination, First
Page, Last Page, Next and Previous, Go
| | 00:34 | To URL, Show/Hide Buttons and Forms, and I
can also play media, like sound and video.
| | 00:41 | In the second section, I have Liquid
HTML5 and SWF Only, and here I have things
| | 00:45 | like Animation, Go To a Specific Page,
or Go To States in Multistate Objects.
| | 00:51 | And then in the third section, which is PDF
Only, I have a lot of actions related to forms.
| | 00:56 | So I can clear a form, I can print a form,
submit a form, and I can also go to next
| | 01:01 | and previous views, open a
file or change the zoom Level.
| | 01:05 | It's worth noting that the Print Form
action doesn't require you to have a form
| | 01:10 | in your PDF; it can be
used to print any PDF file.
| | 01:14 | Let's build some PDF-only buttons.
| | 01:15 | In my Pages panel I'll go to my master
page and zoom in down at the bottom where I
| | 01:22 | have these two objects:
Print and Enter/Exit Full Screen.
| | 01:26 | And I've gone ahead and made these into buttons.
| | 01:28 | I'll select Print first, open the
Buttons and Forms panel, and I can see I've
| | 01:33 | given this the name Print. I want to set
an event, so On Release or Tap, and the
| | 01:38 | Action will be Print Form.
| | 01:42 | Also notice that this button
has a Normal and a Rollover state.
| | 01:45 | If I select the Normal State and
double-click to select the frame, I can open
| | 01:50 | my Effects panel by choosing Window >
Effects and then double-click at the Fill level.
| | 01:57 | And I can see that it's got a Bevel
and Emboss with a Direction of Up.
| | 02:00 | I'll cancel out, select the Rollover
State, double-click to select the frame,
| | 02:08 | select Fill in the Effects panel and
see that the Direction of the Bevel has
| | 02:12 | changed to Down here.
| | 02:13 | So that's how this rollover effect was created.
| | 02:16 | I'll cancel out and close the Effects
panel and go back to the Normal state.
| | 02:21 | Now I'll select my other
button: Enter/Exit Full Screen.
| | 02:24 | This button has a Name of "full" and for
the Event, On Release or Tap. I'll choose
| | 02:29 | the action View Zoom, Zoom
to Full Screen, and that's it.
| | 02:35 | Since this is the master page on which
all my document pages are based, these
| | 02:39 | buttons will always be visible
for the person viewing the PDF.
| | 02:42 | So let's test them out.
| | 02:43 | We'll export this document to an
interactive PDF. I'll press Command+E or
| | 02:48 | Ctrl+E, choose Format Adobe PDF
Interactive, we'll just call it button test, and
| | 02:55 | export it to the Desktop.
| | 02:58 | I'll choose View After Exporting and click OK.
| | 03:01 | Then when the document opens in
Acrobat, it tries open in Full Screen mode.
| | 03:08 | So I'll say OK, and I'll test out my buttons.
| | 03:11 | I'll click Print and it
brings up the Print dialog box.
| | 03:16 | I can also use this button to exit
the Full Screen mode or enter it again.
| | 03:23 | When you know you're going to be
exporting your interactive document to PDF, you
| | 03:26 | can take advantage of the PDF Only
buttons to do things like print and change
| | 03:30 | the view of the document to full screen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using a SWF slideshow in a PDF | 00:00 | Slideshows are a great way to bring
content alive in interactive documents, and
| | 00:05 | there are a few different
ways of making slideshows.
| | 00:07 | One way that gives you a lot of
flexibility is to use multi-state objects
| | 00:10 | together with buttons.
| | 00:12 | When you use this method, you have
to export the slideshow as a SWF.
| | 00:16 | If your final product is then an
interactive PDF, you'll have to place the SWF
| | 00:20 | file back in InDesign and then export to PDF.
| | 00:23 | So let's go through the process of
creating a SWF slideshow in an interactive PDF.
| | 00:28 | Here I have a PDF of an artist portfolio.
| | 00:31 | PDF contains a slideshow where
the person viewing it can view the
| | 00:34 | paintings, either by clicking a
number on the side or by clicking the
| | 00:38 | forward and back buttons.
| | 00:39 | So I'll click the numbers and we
have the forward and back buttons.
| | 00:46 | And you can see that as I
navigate through the portfolio there's some
| | 00:51 | animation there too.
| | 00:52 | The number I click on gets that
purple-colored bar and the painting and the
| | 00:56 | description of it fade in.
| | 00:58 | Now let's go to InDesign
and see how to build this.
| | 01:00 | I'll open my Layers panel
and look at the images layer.
| | 01:05 | In the images layer of this document I
have a group for each portfolio piece.
| | 01:09 | So I can tip open one of
these and see what I have here.
| | 01:14 | So I have a JPEG of the picture,
I have a text frame, and I have a rectangle
| | 01:18 | which is going to correspond to the
little purple rectangle over here in the
| | 01:22 | navigation controls.
| | 01:23 | They are all stacked one on top of
another and aligned so the top and left
| | 01:27 | edges of the paintings all line up.
| | 01:29 | There is also a frame
with no stroke and no fill;
| | 01:33 | that's this rectangle down here at the bottom.
| | 01:34 | This empty frame will allow me to hide
the slideshow as needed. And also notice
| | 01:39 | the circle icons on the
bottom right of all these objects.
| | 01:43 | That shows that there's some
animation applied here too.
| | 01:46 | So if I select one and go to the
Animation panel, I can see that it's set to
| | 01:51 | fade in on page load and if I look in
the Timing panel, I can see groupings
| | 01:57 | where the picture and the
description are grouped together.
| | 02:00 | So that way they will fade in at the same time.
| | 02:03 | Now I want to select all the paintings
and make them into a multi-state object
| | 02:07 | and since I set this document up with
everything I need for the multi-state
| | 02:10 | object on a single layer, I can just go
the Layers panel and click the square on
| | 02:15 | the right side to select all the objects.
| | 02:17 | Now I can go to my Object States panel,
click the New button, and I have a
| | 02:22 | multi-state object with each
one of the paintings as a state.
| | 02:26 | And down at the bottom I have that empty state.
| | 02:30 | I am actually going to rename
this "none" and drag it to the top.
| | 02:37 | This way I can keep the
slideshow hidden until I want it to play.
| | 02:40 | I will give my multi-state object a name.
| | 02:43 | I will call it portfolio. And now I need
to set up some buttons to trigger each of
| | 02:47 | the states that I want to show.
| | 02:49 | So over on the left I will select this
top rectangle, I will go to my Buttons
| | 02:54 | panel, I'll click on the plus, and
choose Go To State of our multistate object
| | 03:00 | portfolio, Go To State 1.
| | 03:05 | I'll select the second rectangle and do
the same thing: convert it to a button,
| | 03:11 | go to State, portfolio Object, and
this one will go to State 2, and so on.
| | 03:18 | I'll repeat the process
for the remaining buttons.
| | 03:21 | Now I want to set up the forward and back
buttons for another way to navigate the portfolio.
| | 03:26 | I'll select the triangle pointing to
the right and in the Buttons and Forms
| | 03:29 | panel, I see it already made it into a button.
| | 03:31 | I've named it Next and I've even given
it a rollover state with our purple fill.
| | 03:36 | Now let's add an action, Go To
Next State of the Object portfolio.
| | 03:42 | We will do the other one.
| | 03:45 | Select it. This button is called
previous, Action, Go To Previous State.
| | 03:50 | I'll deselect and select my navigation
controls, and notice how they're grouped,
| | 03:55 | and that's so I can apply an animation to them.
| | 03:57 | I will go to the Animation panel.
| | 04:01 | I'll choose Fade In and we will make it a
little quicker, say three quarters of a second.
| | 04:06 | Now let's test the
slideshow in the SWF Preview panel.
| | 04:11 | The animation fades in. I can click on
the navigation controls and use them
| | 04:18 | to navigate through the portfolio. And this
will work great in SWF exported from this file.
| | 04:24 | But what about a PDF?
| | 04:25 | If I just export this file right
now to PDF, none of this will work.
| | 04:30 | That's because the actions I attached to
the buttons were SWF-only actions, plus the
| | 04:34 | animations were SWF-only.
| | 04:36 | So what I have to do first is export
these elements to SWF and then place that
| | 04:40 | SWF in my layout, and finally export
it all to PDF, and then it will work.
| | 04:45 | I will close the SWF Preview panel,
and first I will draw out some guides to
| | 04:49 | mark the locations of the objects
that I am going to export to SWF.
| | 04:53 | I'll drag out a horizontal
guide and a vertical guide.
| | 04:59 | I'll open the Layers panel.
| | 05:00 | I will select everything on my images
layer and hold down Shift and click
| | 05:05 | to select everything on the Navigation layer
too, so everything I want to export out to SWF.
| | 05:10 | I'll press Command+E or Ctrl+E. I will
export to the desktop and I'll just call
| | 05:15 | this Portfolio, Format > SWF, and save.
| | 05:21 | I am going to export just this
selection, Scale of 100%, Background is
| | 05:26 | Transparent, although as we will soon see, we
have more work to do there, and I'll click OK.
| | 05:33 | Once the SWF is done exporting then I
am going to hide the original content.
| | 05:37 | So I'll hide the Navigation layer and
hide the images layer and I'll place that
| | 05:41 | SWF back into my InDesign file.
| | 05:44 | I'll press Command+D to place.
| | 05:47 | I'll choose Portfolio.swf and click Open.
| | 05:52 | Now I can't put it on my images layer,
because I'd hidden that and actually, I
| | 05:55 | didn't want it there anyway,
so I am going to create a new layer.
| | 05:58 | I'll Option+Click or Alt+Click on the
Create New Layer button and I'll name it SWF.
| | 06:04 | Now I can place my place my SWF
right at the same location as the
| | 06:08 | original InDesign objects.
| | 06:10 | Now I'll go to the Media panel and
I'll select Play on Page Load, and I'll
| | 06:15 | choose Poster from Current Frame.
And it doesn't look like much right now, does it?
| | 06:21 | It looks like a big white frame and
that's fairly accurate, because unless we
| | 06:24 | apply a little fix in Acrobat, this is
what the final file is going to look like,
| | 06:29 | And this is a problem that's been
around for a while in InDesign, that it just
| | 06:32 | doesn't render an embedded SWF
properly inside a PDF. But fortunately, in
| | 06:36 | Acrobat, the fix is quick and easy.
| | 06:39 | But first, let's export the PDF.
| | 06:41 | I'll press Command+E, Ctrl+E, I
will choose Format, Adobe PDF, call it
| | 06:46 | Portfolio, and save.
| | 06:49 | I'll accept these settings and click OK.
| | 06:54 | So there you have it, the big white box.
| | 06:56 | Now, to get rid of this, we are in Adobe Acrobat.
| | 06:58 | We will go to Tools > Content >
Multimedia > SWF. I'll double-click.
| | 07:06 | This opens the Edit SWF
dialog box, and right here we have
| | 07:09 | Transparent background.
| | 07:10 | We will click OK, save the file,
close it, and then I'll open it again,
| | 07:19 | and there we have it.
| | 07:20 | The animation plays, I see my
navigation controls come into view, and I can use
| | 07:25 | them to navigate the slideshow.
| | 07:26 | Now, there is one more thing I want to mention.
| | 07:31 | This process of exporting content out
to SWF and then placing it back into
| | 07:34 | InDesign can get a little tedious,
especially if you have lots of pages with
| | 07:39 | things like animations and slideshows.
| | 07:40 | Fortunately, there's a great script
you can use to automate the process.
| | 07:44 | The script is called SWF
Presenter, and it's available from the web
| | 07:47 | site automatication.com.
| | 07:51 | And even though the web site says the
script is for InDesign CS5, it works just
| | 07:55 | as well with InDesign CS6.
| | 07:57 | So let's go back to InDesign.
I'll remove the SWF file that I placed before and
| | 08:02 | go back to my Layers panel and
show the original InDesign content.
| | 08:07 | I'll select it, select everything on
the navigation, and Shift+Click to select
| | 08:11 | everything on images layer. And then
I'll run the script by choosing Window >
| | 08:15 | Utilities > Scripts. And I have a SWF
Presenter in my User scripts folder.
| | 08:21 | I will double-click on it and the
first thing it does is it asked me where to
| | 08:25 | store the SWF files,
| | 08:26 | so I will just store them on the desktop.
And then I get to choose my export settings.
| | 08:31 | I'll export just the selection at 100%
with a transparent background and click OK.
| | 08:39 | The script exports the SWF and then
places it back into InDesign and it creates
| | 08:43 | a new layer for it called swf.presenter.
| | 08:45 | I could go through the same steps as
before, hiding the original content,
| | 08:49 | exporting out to PDF, and then editing
it in Acrobat to make sure that I get
| | 08:53 | that white background removed.
| | 08:55 | In this particular case I'd have
one more step in InDesign also.
| | 08:58 | The SWF Presenter script put the SWF at
the top and left of my page and I need
| | 09:03 | to position it at the same location
as the original content, right there.
| | 09:07 | Here we saw how to create an
interactive slideshow with buttons, multi-state
| | 09:10 | objects, and animation.
| | 09:12 | It took a few steps.
| | 09:13 | We had to set everything up in the
multi-state object, export to SWF, place that
| | 09:18 | back into InDesign, export to PDF,
and then edit the PDF in Acrobat.
| | 09:23 | But by following those steps, we were
able to get the best of both worlds: an
| | 09:26 | interactive PDF with a working SWF
inside it. And we saw a cool script that can
| | 09:30 | help automate the process.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Placing a video and using the Media panel | 00:00 | One of the most dynamic and
interesting elements you can add to your
| | 00:04 | interactive documents is video.
| | 00:05 | You can place videos into your
InDesign documents, use the Media panel to set
| | 00:09 | up the appearance and playback, and preview
how they will work in the SWF Preview panel.
| | 00:14 | Let's see how it works.
| | 00:16 | Here I have a page that I
would like to add video to.
| | 00:18 | The video has already been produced
and it's about all the great things about the Roux Academy.
| | 00:23 | To place it into my layout, I can just
use File > Place, like I was placing text
| | 00:27 | or a picture, or I will just press
Command+D or Ctrl+D. And in the Links folder I
| | 00:32 | will navigate down to roux.mov, and Open.
| | 00:39 | And right away, I get a warning
dialog box telling me, "Media files not
| | 00:44 | supported by Flash."
| | 00:46 | This video will be okay if I export it
to interactive PDF, but it's not to going
| | 00:50 | to make it into an exported SWF.
| | 00:52 | And furthermore, it's recommended that I
convert the video, using the Adobe Media
| | 00:56 | Converter, to Flash video format.
| | 00:58 | I am going to ignore that for now
and click Continue to place the video.
| | 01:04 | It's pretty plain-looking right now,
just a generic video icon here.
| | 01:08 | To manage placed videos in InDesign,
I need to use the Media panel.
| | 01:12 | I will open that up, and I can see,
because of the format of the video, I can't
| | 01:16 | preview in this panel. Nor can I
preview it in the SWF Preview panel.
| | 01:21 | I can set some options like
Play on Page Load and Loop.
| | 01:25 | I can also choose a Poster: None or the
Standard poster, or I could choose a specific image.
| | 01:31 | And I have some basic options to
show no controller or a controller.
| | 01:36 | I can also click on the PDF
options at the bottom of the Media panel
| | 01:41 | and set a description for the video
and have it play in a floating window, and
| | 01:45 | if I do that, I can pick the size
and position of the floating window.
| | 01:49 | I will cancel out of that.
| | 01:52 | Let's export right now to
interactive PDF and see what we get.
| | 01:56 | I will export to the desktop.
I will just call it Video. Click Save.
| | 02:02 | I don't need it to open in Full Screen
mode, but I want to view after exporting.
| | 02:07 | And I will click OK.
| | 02:10 | The file opens in Adobe Acrobat,
and I can click to play the video.
| | 02:17 | (video playing)
| | 02:23 | I can click on it again to pause it.
| | 02:25 | I will close that PDF, and let's go back
and heed the advice InDesign was giving
| | 02:30 | us when it told us to use
the Adobe Media Converter.
| | 02:34 | First of all, I will delete this placed video.
| | 02:38 | So let's switch over to the Adobe Media Encoder.
| | 02:41 | This is a separate application
that comes with the Creative Suite.
| | 02:44 | If you don't have this application,
you can still convert to different video
| | 02:47 | formats with other
applications, some of which are free.
| | 02:50 | In the Media Encoder, at
the top-left I have my queue.
| | 02:55 | This is where I will convert
the format of my video file.
| | 02:58 | I can either drag a movie to this
panel or I can click the plus sign.
| | 03:02 | I will navigate to my links and
choose that video file and click Open.
| | 03:13 | Now for format, F4V is chosen by default.
This is a Flash format and it works
| | 03:18 | quite well in many situations, but if I
want to publish to the iPad, I need to
| | 03:21 | pick a different format, because
Apple's iOS doesn't support Flash.
| | 03:26 | So I can click in the triangle and I
can pick a different format, like H.264.
| | 03:33 | In the Preset menu, I will scroll down
and pick the first iPad video format.
| | 03:42 | On the right, I also have a file path
where the new video file will be created.
| | 03:46 | Now I will click the green play
button and the video is being converted.
| | 03:54 | Now let's go back to
InDesign and place that file.
| | 03:56 | It was created in the Links folder.
I'll scroll down and select a new video file
| | 04:05 | roux.MP4. Click Open.
| | 04:08 | And now I don't get that warning when I
go to place the video and when I place
| | 04:14 | it, I can see the Media
panel looks quite different.
| | 04:17 | Now I can see a preview of the video.
I can scrub through it to see any frame.
| | 04:24 | And when I find one I like, I can use
that as the poster. I will choose Poster:
| | 04:28 | From Current Frame and
click the button on the right.
| | 04:32 | And now for Controllers, instead of having
just one choice, I have a whole bunch of choices.
| | 04:36 | I will choose
SkinOverAllNoCaption and Show Controller on Rollover.
| | 04:42 | I can preview this video in
the SWF Preview panel too.
| | 04:45 | (video playing)
| | 04:55 | Now let's export again and check out our video.
| | 04:57 | I will export to PDF (Interactive).
I call this Video2 > Save > View After
| | 05:05 | Exporting and click OK.
| | 05:09 | (video playing)
| | 05:12 | The video plays and I have my controllers.
| | 05:16 | InDesign will allow you to place video
in several different formats, but it's
| | 05:19 | best to stick to Flash-based video like
FLV or F4V, or H.264-encoded video like
| | 05:26 | MP4 and M4V; that way you get the
most options for control and playback.
| | 05:31 | Just remember that devices running
Apple's iOS won't play video in FLV or F4V,
| | 05:37 | so stick to H.264 encoding if you
want your video to be viewed on an iOS
| | 05:41 | device, like an iPad.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting navigation points | 00:00 | In addition to the general video
controls like play, pause, and volume, you can
| | 00:04 | also add buttons that allow the person
viewing the video to skip directly to a
| | 00:08 | specific point in the movie.
Let's see how it's done.
| | 00:12 | Here I have my document and I've
placed a video file in MP4 format into the
| | 00:16 | layout, and I've created three
buttons that I want to use to jump to
| | 00:20 | specific spots in the video.
| | 00:21 | I call them State of the Art,
Experience, and Artistry.
| | 00:25 | If I want to create navigation points in
InDesign, I can do that in the Media panel.
| | 00:30 | I couldn't do this if the video was in
legacy format, but with Flash video or
| | 00:34 | video with H.264 encoding, I can.
| | 00:37 | So I'll select the video, go to the Media
panel, and right now Navigation Points is empty.
| | 00:44 | So what I need to do is drag the
playhead to the spot where I want to create the
| | 00:47 | first navigation point.
| | 00:49 | I'll drag to around 21, 22 seconds.
| | 00:53 | It's not that easy to get a very
specific spot here. The controls for scrubbing
| | 00:57 | in the Media panel are kind of sticky
and jittery, and not all that precise.
| | 01:01 | It's an exercise in
patience to get what you want.
| | 01:04 | But this will do here. Down below, I'll
click on the plus button and I'll give it
| | 01:09 | a name. I'll call it "state of
the art" and press Return or Enter.
| | 01:16 | I'll drag the playhead again, click
the plus button, call this one "experience"
| | 01:24 | and drag it again to
create a third navigation point.
| | 01:29 | Click plus and I'll call this one artistry.
| | 01:31 | Now to hook these navigation points
up to my buttons. I'll select the first,
| | 01:36 | button State of the Art,
| | 01:38 | go to my Buttons and Forms panel.
| | 01:42 | This button is called State of the Art,
the Event is On Release or Tap, and
| | 01:45 | I'll add the Action > Video, roux.MP4,
Play from Navigation Point, and the
| | 01:52 | Point is state of the art.
| | 01:54 | Let's do it for the second button.
I'll select the Experience button, add an
| | 01:59 | Action > Video, Play from
Navigation Point, experience.
| | 02:06 | And again for Artistry:
| | 02:09 | add an Action > Video, Play
from Navigation Point, artistry.
| | 02:15 | Now let's preview them.
| | 02:16 | I'll click on the first button.
| | 02:19 | (video playing)
The second one.
| | 02:23 | (video playing)
And the third.
| | 02:26 | (video playing)
| | 02:30 | You can add navigation buttons
inside InDesign with either Flash video or
| | 02:33 | H.264-encoded video.
| | 02:36 | The one benefit of Flash video is that
you can also set navigation points in it
| | 02:40 | outside of InDesign using the
Adobe Media Converter application.
| | 02:44 | So let's see how that's done.
| | 02:45 | I'll switch over to the Adobe Media
Encoder application and in the Queue pane,
| | 02:50 | I'll select a video.
| | 02:51 | I'll click the plus button.
| | 02:52 | In my Links panel I'll
select my MP4 and click Open.
| | 03:00 | I need to convert to FLV format, and
I'll click on the preset to open the Export
| | 03:05 | Settings dialog box, and here I can
drag the playhead to about 22 seconds.
| | 03:13 | And navigation points are called cue
points inside the Adobe Media Encoder.
| | 03:17 | I'll click the plus button, click
Cue Point, call this state of the art.
| | 03:24 | Then I'll drag the playhead, add another
cue point, click the plus button, and name
| | 03:31 | this one experience. And a
third one, which I'll call artistry.
| | 03:40 | I'll click OK and click the
green button to encode the new video.
| | 03:50 | When it's done, I'll switch back to
InDesign, I'll remove the MP4, and I'll place
| | 03:54 | the new video, roux.FLV.
| | 04:00 | Click Open, place it, and in the Media
panel, I can see those cue points that I
| | 04:07 | set in the Adobe Media Encoder.
| | 04:09 | Creating navigation points for videos makes
them more interactive and convenient to use.
| | 04:14 | Just remember if you're using
H.264-encoded video, you have to set
| | 04:18 | navigation points in InDesign.
| | 04:19 | If you're using Flash video, you can
use the Adobe Media Converter to embed
| | 04:23 | navigation points, called cue
points, in the video itself.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Placing a video from a URL | 00:00 | In addition to embedding video in an
interactive PDF or SWF output, you can
| | 00:05 | also place a video from a URL.
| | 00:07 | The major benefit of this is that you
end up with a smaller file size, but
| | 00:11 | the trade-off is that you must have an
Internet connection in order to play the video.
| | 00:16 | To place a video from URL, I select a frame
in my layout that I want to contain the video.
| | 00:21 | Down below here I have a URL. I'll
select that, copy it, select the frame where
| | 00:29 | I want to place the video,
and go to the Media panel.
| | 00:33 | I'll click down here on this button to
Place a Video from a URL and paste in
| | 00:37 | the URL. I'll click OK.
| | 00:41 | And now in the Media panel I can
see I have all the normal options for
| | 00:44 | working with video.
| | 00:46 | I can scrub ahead to see the video,
I can set a poster for it, set
| | 00:52 | controllers, and so on.
| | 00:54 | So again, the benefit of placing a
video from URL is that you don't bloat your
| | 00:58 | document, increasing its file size with
all that video data. But the downside
| | 01:02 | is that if someone places the document without
an Internet connection, the video won't play.
| | 01:07 | Two other things to remember: first,
the video must be a Flash video, and
| | 01:12 | second, the URL has to be directly to
the video. So not every video you see
| | 01:17 | online can be placed from its
URL into an InDesign document.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating hyperlinks from URLs| 00:00 | Creating hyperlinks in your InDesign
document is a pretty simple task, but if
| | 00:04 | your document has lots of hyperlinks,
you might save yourself some time and
| | 00:08 | drudgery by having InDesign find all the
URLs in your document and automatically
| | 00:12 | make them into live hyperlinks.
| | 00:14 | But just be aware that this
feature does have a pretty big flaw.
| | 00:18 | The convert URLs to hyperlinks
feature is a lot like InDesign's standard
| | 00:22 | Find/Change, and it will find any
URLs lurking in your documents.
| | 00:26 | In fact, it might be trying a little
too hard to find URLs and it'll end up
| | 00:30 | making hyperlinks out of lots of
things that aren't really URLs.
| | 00:34 | So for example, here have a text frame
in my document and I have some things
| | 00:38 | that really look like URLs with .com, org,
| | 00:41 | .biz, and so forth, and then
I have some other things.
| | 00:44 | I'll zoom in and here I have
InDesign.InDesign, InDesign.zz. I have some file
| | 00:51 | names. I have an email address.
| | 00:53 | And here I just have a simple typo where
I forgot to put a space after the period.
| | 00:57 | So let's zoom out a little bit, and
we will go to the Hyperlinks panel and
| | 01:03 | choose Convert URLs to Hyperlinks.
| | 01:06 | In the dialog box, I can set the Scope,
so I can choose Document or if I have a
| | 01:11 | text frame selected, I can Search
that story or if I have a range of text
| | 01:15 | selected, I can search just the selection.
| | 01:18 | I will keep it on Document. I can have
InDesign apply character style to all the
| | 01:23 | things it thinks are URLs, and then I
can click Find to navigate to the next
| | 01:28 | suspected URL. In this case,
it's down here: www.rouxacademy.com.
| | 01:33 | I am going to click Convert All and
have InDesign convert everything it thinks
| | 01:37 | is a URL into a hyperlink.
| | 01:41 | It goes to the document. it tells me
how many it found. I will click OK,
| | 01:46 | close the dialog box, and now let's take a look
in the Hyperlinks panel and see what we found.
| | 01:50 | rouxacademy.com. So far so good.
| | 01:54 | InDesign.com, InDesign.org, InDesign.bizz.
| | 01:58 | But now once I get down here, it found
InDesign.InDesign and thinks that's a
| | 02:02 | hyperlink and so forth.
| | 02:04 | InDesign.zz, it found the file names.
Here's actually a little bit of good
| | 02:09 | news: it did find the email address and
created a mailto link, so this would actually work.
| | 02:14 | If someone clicked on this, it would
open your mail client and allow you to send
| | 02:18 | email from that link.
| | 02:20 | It found typos and other file names.
| | 02:23 | So the point here is the Convert URLs
to Hyperlinks feature can be a timesaver,
| | 02:28 | especially when you have a document with
lots of hyperlinks to make, but just be
| | 02:32 | aware that it can find lots of
things that aren't really URLs.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Working with PDF FormsAn overview of PDF forms| 00:00 | The new Form tools in InDesign CS6 can
help you create great looking form fields
| | 00:05 | inside your layout, without having to
rely on Acrobat's Form Recognition tools
| | 00:10 | or a lot of manual work after you export a PDF.
| | 00:12 | So you can definitely get better form
results faster with these new tools.
| | 00:16 | But you should be aware
that there are some limitations.
| | 00:18 | These tools don't fully replace Acrobat,
and you can't yet do a full end-to-end
| | 00:23 | forms workflow with just InDesign.
| | 00:25 | For example, people using Adobe Reader
won't be able to save their data in the
| | 00:29 | forms you export from InDesign, unless
you enable rights to do so using Acrobat.
| | 00:34 | Another limitation to be aware of is
that you can't export to Adobe DPS or to
| | 00:38 | HTML and have the forms you create
in InDesign work in those outputs.
| | 00:42 | In most cases, you're still going to
need a workflow where you start your form
| | 00:46 | work in InDesign, and then you or
someone else finishes building the full
| | 00:49 | functionality in Acrobat.
| | 00:51 | If you're interested in learning more
about working with PDF forms in Acrobat, I
| | 00:55 | recommend you check out
Claudia McCue's Acrobat X:
| | 00:58 | Creating Forms in the lynda.com
online training library.
| | 01:02 | So what can you actually do
with InDesign's Form tools?
| | 01:04 | Well you can design great looking
forms with functioning text fields, radio
| | 01:08 | buttons, check boxes and signature fields.
| | 01:11 | You can also make buttons that can be used
to print the form or submit it via email.
| | 01:15 | And in the cases of check boxes and
radio buttons, you can also create custom
| | 01:20 | On/Off and Hover states to improve
your forms appearance and usability.
| | 01:24 | Here's an example of a form that
I built completely in InDesign.
| | 01:27 | It has text fields that I can click in and
fill in data, I can tab over to other fields.
| | 01:34 | It has check boxes that I can select.
| | 01:37 | It has list boxes that I can pick from.
| | 01:40 | Some more check boxes, radio buttons,
text fields, and signature fields.
| | 01:49 | It also has buttons to print
the form, and submit it via email.
| | 01:57 | So with InDesign's CS6, for the first
time you may be able to accomplish the
| | 02:00 | bulk of your form workflow in InDesign.
| | 02:03 | So let's get started building some forms.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating text fields and signature fields| 00:00 | Let's begin our look at InDesign's PDF
Form tools by creating two kinds of form
| | 00:04 | objects: text fields and signature fields.
| | 00:07 | If you've ever created buttons in
InDesign, the process of creating form objects
| | 00:11 | will be familiar to you.
| | 00:12 | And even if you've never created a
button in your life, the process is not
| | 00:16 | all that hard to grasp.
| | 00:17 | Let's say I want to create a text
field here next to first name. I have just a
| | 00:21 | regular InDesign frame here, and I can
select it and go to the Buttons and Forms
| | 00:26 | panel, and in Type, I can select Text Field.
| | 00:31 | I can give it a name, I'll click on
Name, and I'll call it first name.
| | 00:36 | And form objects get a little
icon that shows you what they are.
| | 00:40 | This icon never changes size when you
zoom in or zoom out, but it will disappear
| | 00:44 | if you zoom way out,
| | 00:45 | so your form objects are very small on screen.
| | 00:47 | Each kind of form object has its own
unique indicator and I created an example
| | 00:52 | of each kind out here on the
pasteboard, just to show those little icons.
| | 00:57 | So starting from the top we have a
check box, a combo box, a list box, radio
| | 01:02 | button, a signature field and a text field.
| | 01:06 | And if I zoom in, I can see that this
is a text field. I'll zoom back out,
| | 01:17 | and let's do some more work
in the Buttons and Forms panel.
| | 01:19 | Under the PDF Options I can enter a
description that will appear as a tooltip
| | 01:24 | when the user roles over
the form field in the PDF.
| | 01:27 | I can also select any of these options
down here to enable or disable printing,
| | 01:32 | to make the form field required, to
require a password, to make it read-only, to
| | 01:37 | allow multiple lines of
text and to allow scrolling.
| | 01:40 | For list boxes, text fields, and combo
boxes, you can also specify a font size,
| | 01:46 | or you can leave it at Auto.
| | 01:49 | If you leave it at Auto, the size of the
text will depend on the size of the field.
| | 01:53 | Down to the bottom of the
panel there are a few buttons.
| | 01:56 | On the left is a Preview button, and it
would be cool if we could preview our PDF
| | 02:01 | forms right in InDesign, but remember
this button opens the SWF Preview panel,
| | 02:05 | so you can't use it to preview
PDF interactivity, like forms.
| | 02:10 | On the right you have a button to
convert the form field back to a
| | 02:12 | regular InDesign object.
| | 02:15 | Let's look at another kind
of form object you can make;
| | 02:17 | a signature field where someone
can enter a digital signature.
| | 02:21 | Down at the bottom of this page, I have a frame
that I'd like to convert into a signature field.
| | 02:26 | So I'll select it, and in the
panel choose Type > Signature Field.
| | 02:32 | And this also can have a
description and has a few options.
| | 02:36 | Now let's export this document to
PDF and try these two form fields.
| | 02:40 | I'll press Command+E, I'll just
call it Form and put it on the Desktop.
| | 02:46 | I'll just look at this current page and
choose View After Exporting and click OK.
| | 02:53 | Let's try out that text field, and we'll
scroll down, and click on the signature
| | 02:59 | field, and it works!
| | 03:01 | In this movie we saw how to create two
kinds of form objects in InDesign; text
| | 03:05 | fields where the user can enter their
own custom text, and signature fields,
| | 03:09 | which can be used to apply
digital signature to a PDF.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating list boxes and combo boxes| 00:00 | If your PDF form needs a place where
users can choose items from a list, you
| | 00:05 | need either a list box or a combo box.
| | 00:07 | Both of which can be created in InDesign CS6.
| | 00:10 | So let's start with the list box.
| | 00:12 | Up here in the Personal Details section
of my form I need to make a list for the
| | 00:17 | states for applicants to
choose to say where they're from.
| | 00:20 | So over here in States, I
have just regular InDesign frame.
| | 00:23 | I'll go to my Buttons and Forms
panel and I'll choose Type > List Box.
| | 00:29 | I'll give it a name, state, and down
here I need to enter the List Items.
| | 00:36 | So I need to enter the
abbreviations for the various states.
| | 00:40 | I can click the Plus button after each
one or I can use a keyboard shortcut.
| | 00:46 | So I'll enter in a state name and I hold
down Shift and then press Return or Enter.
| | 00:51 | This keeps my cursor in the List Items
dialog box and I can just keep typing
| | 00:55 | state names, and so on.
| | 00:57 | Once I have my list items, I can click
on an item to make it the default choice
| | 01:01 | displayed in the PDF.
| | 01:03 | If I don't want any default selection,
I can click on an item to remove the
| | 01:07 | highlighting and its default status.
| | 01:10 | If you don't choose a default with the list,
then the first item is going to be visible.
| | 01:14 | So here I'll just enter another item
called CHOOSE STATE and make that the default.
| | 01:21 | I can also sort the items
alphabetically, if I want to.
| | 01:25 | One thing to be aware of is that you can't
edit a list item after you've entered it.
| | 01:29 | So if you make a typo and enter that,
you are going to have to delete the list
| | 01:32 | item and then replace it with a new one.
| | 01:36 | Those are the options for list box.
| | 01:38 | Let's make a combo box now.
| | 01:40 | I'll scroll down and here under Actual
Grade, I would like to enter a combo box.
| | 01:45 | So here's where I would like the
person to be able to enter in the actual
| | 01:49 | grade they received in a course and I
can make a list of A, B, and C grades,
| | 01:53 | or I can allow them to enter in their
own grade, say if they got pass or fail,
| | 01:58 | A+, C-, and so forth.
| | 02:00 | So right now this is a Text Field.
| | 02:01 | I'm going to select from the Type
menu and convert it to a Combo Box.
| | 02:07 | Notice the name changed and
so did some of the options?
| | 02:10 | I'll enter in some List items.
| | 02:12 | So I'll press A and Shift+Return, B+Shift
+Return, C+Shift+Return, and notice that
| | 02:19 | there's no option in the Buttons and
Forms panel to allow me to allow the user
| | 02:23 | to enter custom text.
| | 02:25 | For that, that's going to be one of
those post InDesign processes that we
| | 02:28 | have to do in Acrobat.
| | 02:30 | So let's export this document out to PDF
and try out our list box and our combo box.
| | 02:35 | I'll press Command+E, go to my Desktop,
and I'll call it LIST AND COMBO, and click OK.
| | 02:48 | So here I have it in Acrobat.
| | 02:49 | I have my default CHOOSE STATE or I can
pick from the list of the states that I
| | 02:55 | typed in, and down below I've my combo
box where I can select an actual grade.
| | 03:03 | But if I try to type in some custom text
to say pass, I'm unable to do that yet.
| | 03:09 | So again, this is something that you
have to fix in Acrobat, because you can't
| | 03:12 | set custom text on a combo box in InDesign yet.
| | 03:16 | So I'll go to Tools > Forms > Edit and
then I'll double-click on this form field.
| | 03:24 | In the options, I'll select
allow user to enter custom text.
| | 03:29 | I'll close the dialog
box and close Form Editing.
| | 03:33 | Now let's try that.
| | 03:37 | In this movie we saw how to create
two similar kinds of form objects in
| | 03:40 | InDesign: list boxes and combo boxes.
| | 03:44 | Both of these allow the PDF
user to select items from a list.
| | 03:48 | Combo boxes can also be added in Acrobat
to allow people to add their own custom
| | 03:52 | text instead of just picking
from the list that you create.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating checkboxes and radio buttons| 00:00 | Check boxes are buttons in a form that
the user can click to make a selection.
| | 00:04 | So these buttons are either checked or
unchecked, on or off, but we can define
| | 00:09 | appearances for other states as well.
| | 00:11 | For example, when the user rolls over
the check box it can change its appearance.
| | 00:16 | I can start with any frame so I'll just
draw out a new frame, and in the Buttons
| | 00:21 | and Forms panel I'll check Type > Check Box.
| | 00:25 | And when I do, the frame that I
started with is grouped with a check mark
| | 00:29 | that fits inside of it, and I have
Appearance options inside the Buttons and Forms panel.
| | 00:33 | I can set upto six different
appearances for the check box.
| | 00:37 | These will determine how the check box
looks when the PDF user interacts with it.
| | 00:40 | For example, there are states for
Normal, when the user is not interacting with
| | 00:44 | the check box, Rollover; when the user
rolls their cursor over it, and Click
| | 00:49 | for when they click it.
| | 00:51 | And since a check box can be either on
or off when the user does those things,
| | 00:55 | there are on and off versions of
Normal, Rollover and Click, making for six
| | 00:59 | potential appearances in all.
| | 01:01 | In this form I set check boxes for
each of the courses, so the person can
| | 01:05 | indicate which ones they want to enroll in.
| | 01:08 | And notice that I made the check
boxes really large so that they cover
| | 01:12 | the entire course name.
| | 01:13 | That gives the user a nice big place to
click, not just this little tiny check box.
| | 01:18 | The way that I did that is I double-
clicked on the check box and I just
| | 01:21 | dragged out the frame.
| | 01:24 | The other kind of form object we're
going to look at in this movie is a radio
| | 01:28 | button and it acts basically like a group of
check boxes that are related to one another.
| | 01:32 | Only one of the check boxes in the
group can be selected at any time.
| | 01:36 | On my pasteboard I'll just delete that
check box and I'll press the L key on my
| | 01:40 | keyboard to get my Ellipse tool,
and I'll drag out a little circle.
| | 01:44 | I'll hold Option or Alt and drag down
couple times to make three of these. I'll
| | 01:50 | select them all and in the Buttons and
Forms panel I'll choose Radio Button.
| | 01:55 | Same as with the check box there are
six appearance states that you can set
| | 01:59 | for a radio button to control what it looks
like in the PDF when the user interacts with it.
| | 02:03 | So for each of these I can select Normal
on or off, Rollover on/off and Click on/off.
| | 02:12 | Also with both check boxes and Radio
buttons you don't have been draw them
| | 02:15 | from scratch, you can choose from the Panel
menu in the Sample Buttons and Forms library.
| | 02:20 | Of course, you can also tweak any of
those to make them look the way you want to.
| | 02:24 | In this form I set up radio buttons for
things like Male and Female, Yes and No,
| | 02:28 | where I wanted people to make just one choice.
| | 02:31 | These two objects are
radio button and these too.
| | 02:37 | Also I want to say a couple of words
about the way your form objects will appear
| | 02:41 | in Acrobat or Reader.
| | 02:42 | For things like text fields, combo
boxes, list boxes, and signature fields,
| | 02:46 | don't bother with any
fancy formatting in InDesign.
| | 02:49 | Only the solid stroke and the solid
fill color will get passed into the PDF.
| | 02:54 | No drop shadows or other effects, no
stroke styles, no gradient fills, and so on.
| | 02:58 | Also don't bother with trying to
customize the font used inside any of these
| | 03:02 | objects. InDesign isn't going to pass
that information on to the PDF, so you're
| | 03:06 | going end up with the
Acrobat default font anyway.
| | 03:09 | Now let's export this to PDF and take a
look at the form to see the check boxes
| | 03:13 | and radio buttons in action.
| | 03:15 | I'll export it to my Desktop, call it
Checkboxes, and I'll export the page with the form.
| | 03:24 | So here I can select a gender, I can
select courses, and I can say Yes or No.
| | 03:33 | In this movie we saw how to create
check boxes and radio buttons, both of which
| | 03:37 | allow the user to click and select
an item. The difference is that radio
| | 03:41 | buttons act like a set of related
check boxes where the user can select only
| | 03:45 | one thing at a time.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating tab order for PDF forms| 00:00 | When you're creating a PDF form an
important consideration is the tab order.
| | 00:05 | Setting a logical tab order will
increase the usability of your form and help
| | 00:08 | people fill it out quicker.
| | 00:10 | Tab order is also important as an
accessibility feature of your PDFs.
| | 00:14 | Screen readers and other assistive
devices can use the tab order to help someone
| | 00:19 | who's visually impaired
navigate through the form.
| | 00:22 | To set the tab order you might expect
there to be some kind of control in the
| | 00:25 | Buttons and Forms panel.
| | 00:27 | But it's not there.
| | 00:28 | In fact, there are two ways to set tab order.
| | 00:31 | The traditional way is by choosing
Object > Interactive > Set Tab Order.
| | 00:36 | And here you'll quickly see one
reason why it's important to give your form
| | 00:40 | objects descriptive names when you create them.
| | 00:43 | There's no feature to navigate to the
form object or highlight it in any way in
| | 00:47 | here, and since it's a dialog box, you
can't select any objects in the layout to
| | 00:51 | check which items correspond to these.
| | 00:54 | These are also the names of the form
objects that will be read by a screen reader.
| | 00:58 | Once you've given your form objects useful
names, setting the tab order is fairly easy.
| | 01:03 | Just select which item you want to
move and click the Move Up or Move Down
| | 01:06 | buttons until you have
everything in the order that you want it.
| | 01:09 | So I could move City up or down, and so forth.
| | 01:14 | When you're done, click OK.
| | 01:16 | CS6 adds a new way to set tab order
that's more flexible than using the dialog
| | 01:20 | box, and that is to use the Articles panel.
| | 01:24 | The Articles panel is often used to
determine the structure and order of content
| | 01:27 | in an EPUB exported from InDesign.
| | 01:30 | It also lets you determine the reading order
of content in a PDF and the tab order as well.
| | 01:36 | You can open the Articles panel
by choosing Window > Articles.
| | 01:39 | To create tab order for your form
object, you drag and drop them one by one
| | 01:43 | into the Articles panel.
| | 01:45 | So I'll just start with first name,
and I can give it a name, and I'll select
| | 01:53 | Include When Exporting, I'll drop in
last name, date of birth, and Address.
| | 02:07 | Note that each form field is a separate article.
| | 02:09 | I don't want to include them all in the
same article or I won't be able to set
| | 02:14 | the order correctly.
| | 02:15 | Then to change the tab order I just
need to drag articles inside the panel.
| | 02:18 | So if I want to move Address
above date of birth, I can do that.
| | 02:22 | So now in the tab order it will come
after Last Name and before date of birth.
| | 02:26 | When I'm done setting the order, I'll
go to the Articles Panel menu and choose
| | 02:31 | Use Reading Order in Tagged PDF.
| | 02:35 | Now let's export this document to
interactive PDF and test our tab order.
| | 02:39 | I'll save it as Tab on the Desktop,
and then in the dialog box I'll specify
| | 02:45 | Tagged PDF, Create Tag PDF, Use
Structure for Tab Order, and click OK.
| | 02:53 | Now let's test our tab order.
| | 02:54 | I'll put my cursor in First Name,
I'll press tab, I go to Last Name, tab to
| | 03:00 | Address, and then tab to Date of Birth.
| | 03:04 | Creating logical tab order is
important for making your PDFs usable and
| | 03:07 | accessible and with CS6 setting
the tab order is easier than ever
| | 03:12 | thanks to the Articles panel!
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating Submit, Print, and Clear Form actions| 00:00 | In addition to allowing users to fill
in forms with information, you also want
| | 00:05 | them to be able to perform
some actions with the form.
| | 00:08 | You might want to create buttons that
allow people to print a form, submit a
| | 00:11 | form when they're done, and to clear
a form if they want to erase all their
| | 00:15 | input and start again.
| | 00:16 | With InDesign CS6, you can create
buttons that do all of these things.
| | 00:20 | So here at the bottom of my document I
have three buttons: Print Form, Submit
| | 00:24 | Form and Clear Form.
| | 00:26 | I'll start with Print Form.
| | 00:27 | I have already made it a button.
| | 00:29 | I've given it a name and a description.
| | 00:33 | Now I just need to add an Action, I'll click
the plus sign, choose PDF Only, Print Form.
| | 00:41 | Now I'll click on Submit Form and for
the Action, Submit Form, and here I can
| | 00:49 | add a URL, so I'll type
in mailto: and the address.
| | 00:56 | In this case I'll do admissions@rouxacademy.com
and this one too has a description.
| | 01:03 | Finally, I'll do Clear Form and I'm done.
| | 01:08 | Let's export to PDF and test these buttons.
| | 01:10 | I'll choose Export to the Desktop,
I'll just call it Submit, and I'll choose
| | 01:18 | View After Exporting.
| | 01:25 | Scroll down, so I can see my
buttons and let's test them.
| | 01:30 | Clicking Print opens my Print dialog box.
| | 01:34 | Clicking Submit will open my default
email client, and let's fill in some
| | 01:39 | content and then clear it.
| | 01:42 | Adding actions to your forms is as
simple as creating a few regular buttons and
| | 01:46 | then assigning actions that allow
people to print, submit and clear the form.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Incorporating Animation and SWF Files in a PortfolioExploring the Animation Encyclopedia script | 00:00 | When you're trying to learn InDesign's
animation tools, a great resource is the
| | 00:04 | Animation Encyclopedia
script that comes with InDesign.
| | 00:08 | When you run the script, it creates
examples of many different kinds of
| | 00:11 | animation effects that you
can learn and be inspired from.
| | 00:14 | So let's check it out.
| | 00:15 | To run the Animation Encyclopedia
script, we need to open the Script panel by
| | 00:19 | going to Window > Utilities > Scripts.
| | 00:23 | Then inside the panel open the
Application folder, and the Samples folder, and
| | 00:29 | that will open JavaScript and
choose AnimationEncyclopedia.jsx.
| | 00:34 | We will double-click it to run the script.
| | 00:40 | And I will close the panel.
| | 00:41 | When the script is done, it's created
a new document, added several pages to
| | 00:46 | it, and placed many different animated
objects on the pages along with labels
| | 00:50 | that identify each one.
| | 00:51 | I will go to the first page of
document which is called Animation Properties.
| | 00:57 | It's set up to show me examples
of each of the seven properties.
| | 01:00 | Now I want to see what these animations can do.
| | 01:02 | So I will open my SWF
Preview panel, nice and large.
| | 01:07 | And click the Play button.
| | 01:09 | Then I can click anywhere on the
page in the Preview panel to play these
| | 01:12 | animations one by one.
| | 01:22 | I am going to hold down Option or Alt
and click on the Play button again to
| | 01:26 | replay the Preview and let's see those again.
| | 01:29 | Motion path allows me to move an
object on the page. Rotation allows me to
| | 01:34 | spin or turn an object.
| | 01:36 | With Opacity, I can fade in object in
or out. With Scale, I can make an object
| | 01:41 | grow or shrink in size.
| | 01:44 | Combination combines the effects of all
four, so I am moving, rotating, scaling
| | 01:48 | and fading an object all at once.
| | 01:51 | Color Fade transitions from one fill
color to another, and Motion Path with
| | 01:55 | Curve shows that we don't have to move
objects along straight lines if we don't want to.
| | 02:00 | Let's close the SWF Preview panel
and see how these examples were made.
| | 02:03 | I will click on the Motion Path example
and I can see this long green line here;
| | 02:09 | this is the motion path
indicating where the rectangle will move.
| | 02:13 | It has an arrowhead at the end and
little dots all along it to indicate how long
| | 02:17 | it will take the object to move
along each portion of the path.
| | 02:20 | So the motion path is showing me
the distance, direction and time.
| | 02:24 | At the bottom of the page, I have
Motion Path with Curve which is the exact
| | 02:28 | same as the top one except this
motion path was edited to be a curved path
| | 02:32 | instead of a straight one, and we'll get into
working with motion paths later on in more detail.
| | 02:38 | If I select Rotation, I can see that it has
the same motion path as the first example.
| | 02:43 | So where's the rotation coming from?
| | 02:45 | If I open the Animation panel and
click on Properties, I can see down
| | 02:51 | here Rotation 270 degrees.
| | 02:54 | So this rectangle has been set to rotate 270
degrees, in addition to the movement along the path.
| | 02:59 | I'll click on Opacity.
| | 03:02 | Opacity combines the movement along
the motion path with a custom change in
| | 03:06 | opacity to fade out the
object which I can see down here.
| | 03:10 | I will select Scale and I can see that
this object is going to scale down in
| | 03:16 | size to 20% width and height.
| | 03:20 | I will select Combination and
Combination is doing a lot of things.
| | 03:24 | It's got a motion path, its rotating -270
degrees, it's scaling differently in width
| | 03:30 | and in height, and is changing its Opacity.
| | 03:33 | I will select Color Fade and this is
my favorite here because this is a good
| | 03:38 | example of the kind of creative
thinking you can employ with animations.
| | 03:41 | There's nothing inside InDesign's
animation tools that would let you do this
| | 03:44 | kind of fade or dissolve from
one color fill to another.
| | 03:48 | But the person who created this file
figured out that if they used two objects
| | 03:52 | stacked one on top of the other they
could change the opacity of each to make
| | 03:56 | the color change over time.
| | 03:58 | So if I move this rectangle a little bit,
I can see that there are actually two
| | 04:01 | objects here, a purple one and a blue one.
| | 04:04 | During this animation, the blue
rectangle fades in and the purple rectangle
| | 04:07 | fades out so we get a mix of their colors.
| | 04:10 | Let's go to page 2 which gives us
some examples of animation events.
| | 04:15 | An event is something that
triggers the animation to play.
| | 04:17 | So without events there would be no animations.
| | 04:20 | They would be present in
the file but they'd never play.
| | 04:23 | The first event is on page load.
| | 04:26 | So as soon as the page is loaded into
the window the animation will start.
| | 04:30 | If I look at this page in the SWF
Preview panel by pressing Command+Shift+Return
| | 04:34 | or Ctrl+Shift+Enter, I can see that
that animation started immediately.
| | 04:39 | The next event is On Page Click.
| | 04:41 | So this one didn't play immediately
when I loaded the page into the SWF Preview
| | 04:45 | panel. I have to click to play it,
and I can click anywhere on the page.
| | 04:50 | The next is On Click (Self).
| | 04:52 | Here I need to actually click on the
object itself, not just anywhere on the
| | 04:55 | page and each time I click the
object the animation will play again.
| | 05:02 | The next is On Roll Over (Self).
| | 05:04 | Here I don't need to click, just
move my cursor over the object.
| | 05:08 | If I move my cursor away and then
back again, the animation will replay.
| | 05:12 | With On Button Event I trigger the
animation by clicking another object that's
| | 05:16 | been converted to a button.
| | 05:18 | Each time I click the green rectangle
which has been converted to a button, the
| | 05:21 | animation will play.
| | 05:26 | And the final one, On State Load of Multi-State
Object is a little more involved.
| | 05:31 | In this case, each time I click on the
button I go to a different state of a
| | 05:34 | Multi-State Object and the shape of
the purple object changes as it rotates.
| | 05:40 | If I close the SWF Preview panel and
select the purple rectangle and go my
| | 05:45 | Object States panel, I can see that this
is Simple MSO multi-state object, and it
| | 05:50 | has three states; one where it's a
rectangle, one where it's an oval and one
| | 05:55 | where it's a triangle.
| | 05:57 | And if I select the green button and go
to my Buttons and Forms panel, I can see
| | 06:02 | that the Event On Click is to
go to the next state of Simple MSO.
| | 06:06 | Now you might be wondering where these
events were set for some of these objects?
| | 06:10 | The answer is in the Animation panel.
| | 06:12 | If I select the first one On Page Load,
and go to the Animation panel, I can see
| | 06:18 | right here Event: On Page Load.
| | 06:21 | I can set the event from this popup
menu by clicking on the Event name.
| | 06:25 | So I can choose On Page Load, On Page
Click, On Click (Self) or On Roll Over
| | 06:30 | (Self), or On Button Event.
| | 06:34 | Note that I don't have to click on
this tiny triangle over on the right.
| | 06:37 | I can just click on the name of the event.
| | 06:40 | Also did you notice this tiny S here?
It's not Event; it's Event(s), meaning
| | 06:44 | that you can have more than one event
that will trigger in animation and when
| | 06:48 | you do this any of them will
cause the animation to play.
| | 06:51 | This is important to remember since, it
makes it easy to accidentally apply more
| | 06:55 | than one event when you just wanted
to change from one event to another.
| | 06:59 | For example, if I wanted to change this
one from On Page Load, to On Page Click,
| | 07:03 | you might think I will
just select On Page Click.
| | 07:07 | But now look, there are two events
that will trigger this animation.
| | 07:10 | Both On Page Load and On Page Click.
| | 07:13 | So to take On Page Load Off, I
need to select it again from the menu.
| | 07:18 | Now the only event for this
animation is On Page Click.
| | 07:22 | Let's go to the next
page and continue exploring.
| | 07:24 | This page is called Additional
Animation Properties and Settings, and these
| | 07:28 | samples will show us the effect of
setting properties like to Duration and Speed
| | 07:32 | which in animation really
means the change in speed.
| | 07:35 | The Play value which is the number of
times the animation will play when it's
| | 07:39 | triggered, and in the second column, we
have things like Hide Until Animated, Hide
| | 07:44 | After Animating and changes in the Origin.
| | 07:48 | So let's preview this page and look at how
each of these properties affects an animation.
| | 07:54 | Here I have a slow duration, a fast
duration, changes in speed, changes in the
| | 08:01 | number of times an animation plays.
| | 08:07 | I have an animation that was hidden
until it started, an animation that
| | 08:11 | disappears after it's done, and changes
in the origin point, and go to the next
| | 08:17 | page in the document.
| | 08:18 | I will close the SWF Preview panel. I
will open up the Animation panel again and
| | 08:24 | select one of these.
| | 08:26 | Now these examples show us the
differences in the Animate menu.
| | 08:30 | So there is three choices here, From
Current Appearance, To Current Appearance
| | 08:33 | and To Current Location.
| | 08:36 | From Current Appearance means that this
is the starting point and some change in
| | 08:39 | the appearance will occur.
| | 08:41 | To Current Appearance means that this
is what the object will look like at the
| | 08:45 | end of the animation and it will
look like something else at the start.
| | 08:49 | To Current Location means the object will
start out somewhere else and end up here.
| | 08:54 | So let's preview this.
| | 08:58 | The next page shows how we can use the
Timing panel to control the order and
| | 09:02 | timing of multiple animations.
| | 09:05 | If I open the Timing panel, I can
see that these animations have been
| | 09:09 | linked into three groups:
| | 09:12 | A, B and C. Linking animations is
how you make them play together.
| | 09:17 | You can also set delays on each
animation to precisely control when it starts.
| | 09:21 | If I look in the A group,
there are no delays set on here.
| | 09:25 | The value is always 0, but in
the B group there are delays.
| | 09:29 | So B-1 will start one second
after the A animation is finished.
| | 09:33 | B-2 will start half a second after B-1
and B-3 will start one second after B-2.
| | 09:40 | Also if I click to the left of any of the
animation names, I can select the entire group.
| | 09:45 | So in this case, I can see that the B
group has been set to loop the animations.
| | 09:49 | So they will play over and over, and
the C animations will play twice with a
| | 09:53 | quarter second delay between them.
| | 09:55 | Let's preview this page.
| | 10:04 | And I will close the SWF Preview panel
one more time and go to the next page.
| | 10:11 | This last page shows something that's
possible when you use a script to control
| | 10:15 | InDesign's animation tools.
| | 10:17 | So let's preview it.
| | 10:24 | There is a lot going on here.
| | 10:26 | Changes in position, rotation, shape and
opacity are all applied to the same object.
| | 10:31 | Unfortunately, this is beyond
what you can do just inside InDesign.
| | 10:35 | You or someone else would have to write a
script to create this kind of animation.
| | 10:39 | So in one way it's kind of a tease but
its good that it's in here just you know
| | 10:43 | that it's possible to do this kind
of thing with the help of a script.
| | 10:46 | Overall there is a lot to grasp when
you're first learning how to use InDesign's
| | 10:49 | animation tools and the Animation
Encyclopedia script can really help you
| | 10:54 | understand the different
options and how things work.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Animation panel | 00:00 | To create animations in InDesign, you
use the controls in the Animation panel.
| | 00:05 | So let's take a tour of those
controls and see how they work.
| | 00:08 | We will start by opening the Animation
panel. I have it here in my workspace,
| | 00:11 | but if I wanted to open it and I didn't
have it in that workspace, I could also
| | 00:15 | go to Window > Interactive > Animation,
and I will select this text frame on the
| | 00:20 | left and I can see by the icon in the
bottom right corner that some animation
| | 00:24 | has been applied to it.
| | 00:25 | In the panel I can see that the
animation has been given a name, Artists, and it
| | 00:29 | uses the Preset, Fade In.
| | 00:30 | I see a preview of any selected
animation at the top of the panel with
| | 00:34 | the butterfly logo.
| | 00:35 | So when I mouse over it, it fades in.
| | 00:39 | If I look in the Preset menu, I can
see all animation presets that come with
| | 00:42 | InDesign, and there are two sublists.
| | 00:45 | One at the top is simpler animations and
then there are more complex ones below.
| | 00:48 | There is also a choice None at the top
to remove an animation, or I could also
| | 00:54 | click on the trashcan in the
bottom right corner of the panel.
| | 00:57 | Next we have the Events to trigger an animation.
| | 01:00 | This one is set to On Roll Over (Self).
| | 01:02 | If I click on it, I can see the
different choices, On Page Load, On Page Click,
| | 01:08 | On Click (Self), and On Roll Over (Self),
and there is another one that's grayed
| | 01:12 | out currently On Button Event.
| | 01:14 | If I create a button to control this
animation, I can select this choice.
| | 01:18 | With this icon on the right, I can
create a button trigger for an animation.
| | 01:22 | So let's see how that works.
| | 01:24 | Below the author's name I have just a
regular InDesign frame over here and I'd
| | 01:27 | like to make this into a button that
will trigger the animation to play.
| | 01:30 | So I can click on the trigger
and then click on the frame.
| | 01:34 | This is converted into a button and
it's going to play the Animation (Artist).
| | 01:38 | And if I look in the Options
menu, it can do other things too.
| | 01:41 | It can Stop the animation, Pause it,
Resume it, Reverse it, or Stop all animations.
| | 01:48 | I could've also clicked on an
existing button and InDesign would add an
| | 01:51 | additional action to play this animation.
| | 01:54 | And one more thing, if you use the
Create button trigger then be sure you don't
| | 01:58 | forget to give the button a descriptive name.
| | 02:00 | The name button 448 isn't very descriptive.
| | 02:03 | Another important thing to remember
about the Events menu is that you can have
| | 02:07 | more than one event trigger an animation.
| | 02:09 | So if I select the Animation again, I
can see now there are two events that will
| | 02:15 | trigger this animation, On Roll Over
(Self) and On Release of that button.
| | 02:19 | Adding another event doesn't
remove any previously selected events.
| | 02:24 | To do that, I would have to
select them again from this menu.
| | 02:27 | So if I wanted to remove On Roll Over (Self),
I have to come here and deselect it.
| | 02:32 | Now the only event for
this animation is On Release.
| | 02:35 | Now let's look at the other
controls in the Animation panel.
| | 02:38 | Duration is how long the animation
takes to complete, so in this case it will
| | 02:42 | take one second for the artist name
to go from invisible to fully visible.
| | 02:46 | I can also control the number of times
and animation plays or I can set it to
| | 02:51 | loop to play endlessly.
| | 02:52 | Speed is a little deceptive. It's not
really how fast the animation plays.
| | 02:57 | That's controlled by the duration.
| | 02:58 | Speed is really the change in
speed, or easing, as it's called.
| | 03:02 | Many of the presets contain easing
built into them or you can turn that off
| | 03:06 | by choosing None here.
| | 03:09 | You can have an animation Ease In
which means go slow at the start, Ease Out
| | 03:13 | which means slow down at the end or both.
| | 03:16 | The Properties section can be shown
and hidden by this little triangle here.
| | 03:20 | And the first property is Animate and
the choices are From Current Appearance,
| | 03:24 | To Current Appearance, To Current Location.
| | 03:27 | From Current Appearance means use
the object's current appearance as the
| | 03:31 | starting point for the animation.
| | 03:33 | To Current Appearance means use the
object's current appearance as the
| | 03:37 | endpoint of the animation, in other
words, the animation would be reverse of
| | 03:41 | From Current Appearance.
| | 03:43 | And To Current Location tells InDesign
to use the objects current appearance as
| | 03:47 | the starting point and its current
location as the endpoint of the animation.
| | 03:51 | To illustrate let's go to the next
page of this document where I have
| | 03:54 | some simple objects.
| | 03:55 | There are identical black squares and
they have all been set to animate. So they
| | 04:01 | are all going to use this preset
Move Left and Grow, but the property is
| | 04:05 | different for each one.
| | 04:06 | So the first choice here I
have From Current Appearance.
| | 04:09 | I can see the motion path with the
arrow pointing left, so the arrow head on
| | 04:13 | the left over here.
| | 04:14 | Now I will select the second
object, and this one is set to, To
| | 04:18 | Current Appearance.
| | 04:20 | So I have that same exact motion path,
the same length but now the arrowhead is
| | 04:23 | pointing towards the center of the object.
| | 04:25 | So it's going to end up here.
| | 04:28 | The third one has a motion path on the
right starting out over here and ending
| | 04:32 | up at the center of the square, and
this one uses To Current Location.
| | 04:37 | Let's preview those animations.
| | 04:38 | I will open the SWF Preview panel and
click, let's see that one more time, From
| | 04:49 | Current Appearance, To Current
Appearance, and To Current Location.
| | 04:55 | I can also help illustrate these
by showing the animation proxy.
| | 04:58 | So I will select the first one, open the
Animation panel and down here there's a
| | 05:03 | button to show the animation proxy.
| | 05:05 | So this is a little ghosted preview of what
the other end of the animation looks like.
| | 05:10 | So this is where it's going to end up,
large into the left. This is where this
| | 05:15 | one is going to start out, large
and to the left and end up here.
| | 05:20 | And the third one can't show you the
size that it ends up at, but it can show
| | 05:23 | you where it's going to
start out in terms of position.
| | 05:26 | If you can understand those
options, the rest of the controls are
| | 05:29 | pretty straightforward.
| | 05:30 | Back in the panel I can
apply a Rotation to an object.
| | 05:33 | I can set a Reference point for where
the transformations will take place.
| | 05:37 | I can scale objects in either width
or height and I can constrain that
| | 05:42 | or unconstrain it.
| | 05:43 | I can control changes in
Opacity, I can Fade In or Fade Out.
| | 05:47 | Unfortunately, the change in
Opacity is an all or nothing thing.
| | 05:51 | I can't fade in or out to
anything less than 100% or 0%.
| | 05:55 | So I can't fade to save 50% opacity,
and lastly we have Visibility controls.
| | 06:00 | So I can have an object be hidden until
the animation starts, or I can have it
| | 06:04 | disappear after the animation ends.
| | 06:06 | I also have a button down here for
opening the Timing panel and a button for
| | 06:12 | converting a regular path to a motion
path down here, and we'll get into that in
| | 06:16 | another video, and I can click the
trashcan to remove an animation.
| | 06:20 | Let's look in the Panel menu. I have
commands for saving a new preset, so if I
| | 06:24 | tweak all the settings just the way
that I want them, I don't have to redo that
| | 06:28 | work all over and over again.
| | 06:29 | I can save a preset and then
pick it from the Preset menu.
| | 06:33 | I can manage presets to add and
delete presets and I can also preview a
| | 06:37 | selection, the entire spread, or again, if
I had a organically had a path selected
| | 06:42 | I could convert it to a motion path.
| | 06:44 | So there you have it, the Animation panel.
| | 06:46 | It might be the most fun panel to use in
InDesign because it allows you to bring
| | 06:50 | the objects on the page to life.
| | 06:51 | You can have a lot of fun experimenting
with the settings and being creative and
| | 06:55 | I encourage you to do so.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Animating on a motion path| 00:00 | Having the animation
presets to work with is great.
| | 00:03 | It saves you the time and effort
of creating animations from scratch.
| | 00:07 | The downside of working with presets
is well, they are preset to do specific
| | 00:11 | things, and if those aren't the
specific things you want, then you have to
| | 00:15 | do some customizing.
| | 00:15 | One way to customize an animation
is to create your own motion paths.
| | 00:20 | So if I select this frame over here
on the left, and look in the Animation
| | 00:23 | panel, I can see that it's currently using the
Preset Fade In and the Event is On Page Load.
| | 00:29 | So it appears one second after the page loads.
| | 00:32 | But we could experiment with other
kinds of animation to bring people's
| | 00:35 | attention to this person's name.
| | 00:37 | For example, we could have that text
frame come up by choosing Fly in from Bottom.
| | 00:42 | Let's choose that from the
Preset menu, and we'll Preview.
| | 00:48 | Now that was a little too fast for my taste.
| | 00:50 | So let's go back to the
Animation panel, and change the Duration.
| | 00:54 | Let's change it from 1 second to 5 seconds,
and Preview again, and there's a slower effect.
| | 01:04 | Another thing we could change is to
make the name start out lower on the page,
| | 01:07 | but end up in the same place.
| | 01:09 | Go back to the panel again, now with
the frame selected, I can see the motion
| | 01:13 | path, and I can click on it, and interact
with it like I can with any InDesign path.
| | 01:19 | So I can press the A key on my
keyboard to get my Direct Selection tool.
| | 01:23 | I can click on one of the end
points, and I can drag down.
| | 01:27 | I'll hold Shift to constrain
it, and let's preview again.
| | 01:35 | Now the animation starts right down
here where I left that control point.
| | 01:38 | I didn't change the direction
of that path, just the length.
| | 01:42 | So the animation still last 5 seconds,
but now it covers more distance in that time.
| | 01:46 | If I wanted to change the direction of
the animation, I can select the end point
| | 01:52 | and say, I'll drag it up here to
the top-left corner of the document.
| | 01:56 | So now the name will come down like this.
| | 01:58 | Let's preview again.
| | 02:03 | I can also add a curve to the path, so
if I don't want the animation to move in
| | 02:07 | a straight line, I can change it.
| | 02:09 | This time, I'll hold Command+Option
or Ctrl+Alt on the PC to get my Convert
| | 02:13 | Direction Point tool and I'll
click and drag to make this path curve.
| | 02:17 | So now the animation will follow this line.
| | 02:20 | Preview again, and it's a different effect.
| | 02:25 | I can also draw brand new paths
and convert them to motion paths.
| | 02:29 | I'll hide the Preview panel, and take my
Selection tool, and click on the motion
| | 02:33 | path, and I'll delete it.
| | 02:35 | So now this animation has no motion path,
| | 02:37 | but I'm going to draw a new one.
| | 02:39 | I will take my Rectangle Frame
tool, and click and drag out a square.
| | 02:45 | Take my Selection tool and select
both my new square and the animation.
| | 02:51 | Go to the Animation panel, and down at
the bottom, I have this little curved
| | 02:55 | arrow which is Convert to Motion Path.
| | 02:57 | I'll click on that, and now you can see my
square looks green like one of the motion paths.
| | 03:02 | Let's preview.
| | 03:09 | I couldn't see that very well because the
fade in is still part of this animation.
| | 03:12 | So let's take that off.
| | 03:14 | Hide the Preview panel, go to the
Animation panel, and we'll take off Fade
| | 03:19 | In, and preview again.
| | 03:25 | Now that was really fast because the
animation is covering a lot of distance
| | 03:28 | in just a few seconds.
| | 03:29 | But you get the idea.
| | 03:31 | Whatever path I draw, the animation will
follow when I convert it to a motion path.
| | 03:35 | You can also convert paths that you draw
with the Pen tool or the Pencil tool to
| | 03:39 | motion paths the same way.
| | 03:41 | You can even copy and paste paths from
other applications like Photoshop and
| | 03:44 | Illustrator, and make
them into your motion paths.
| | 03:47 | So when it comes to putting objects
in motion, you really can do just about
| | 03:50 | anything you can imagine since you
can take any path and use it as a motion
| | 03:54 | path for your animation.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Animating a list | 00:00 | By default, animations will play On
Page Load and they'll follow the order in
| | 00:04 | which they were created.
| | 00:05 | And that might be fine in some
situations, but more often you're going to want
| | 00:09 | to exert some control over the order
and timing of animations, and for that we
| | 00:13 | can use events and the Timing panel.
| | 00:16 | Here I have a presentation slide
listing the 8 reasons that it's great to study
| | 00:20 | at the Roux Academy.
| | 00:22 | And I'd like to animate this list so the
items appear one-by-one, and for that I
| | 00:26 | need them to each be in separate text frames.
| | 00:29 | If they're all in one text frame, I'd
need to cut and paste the text into eight
| | 00:33 | different frames and
that's exactly what I did here.
| | 00:35 | So I'll select all eight frames with
my Selection tool, and I'll go to my
| | 00:40 | Animations panel, and from the
Preset menu I'll choose Fade In.
| | 00:45 | And now I'll preview the page, they come in one
-by-one, but there's a problem in the middle.
| | 00:54 | The State-of-the-Art
Facilities comes in last. Why is that?
| | 00:58 | InDesign isn't using the arrangement
of frames on the page to determine the
| | 01:02 | order of animations.
| | 01:03 | It's using the order in
which these frames were created.
| | 01:06 | And when I made this list, I
forgot the State-of-the-Art Facilities.
| | 01:09 | So when I remembered it, I added the
frame for that and moved it into position,
| | 01:13 | but you can't fool InDesign. It
still knows that that was the last frame
| | 01:17 | created, so that animation plays last.
| | 01:20 | Now I need to fix that, and
I'll fix that in the Timing panel.
| | 01:23 | Here I can see all the
different animations, and sure enough,
| | 01:26 | State-of-the-Art Facilities is last.
| | 01:29 | So I need to put that forth and now
I'll preview again, and now it plays in
| | 01:40 | the order that I want.
| | 01:41 | The idea that timing is tied to the
order of frame creation is important to
| | 01:45 | always be aware of, since you will
disrupt the timing of animations by doing
| | 01:49 | things like cutting and pasting frames.
| | 01:51 | For example, if I cut the first frame
and paste it in place and preview the
| | 01:57 | animation again, that first item now plays last.
| | 02:07 | Again, to fix it, I can just go to the
Timing panel and drag it to the top of the order.
| | 02:12 | Another useful thing I can do with
the Timing panel is to set delays.
| | 02:16 | If I was going to be talking over these
points as they appear, then I might want
| | 02:19 | to slow them down a bit, and for that I
can select them and apply Delay, and by
| | 02:24 | default the Delay is set to 0, which
makes each animation play immediately after
| | 02:28 | the one preceding it.
| | 02:30 | I'll select all the animations and change
the Delay to one second, and preview again.
| | 02:39 | And now you can see there's a slight
pause in between each item appearing.
| | 02:45 | But what if you were presenting this
slide and you wanted to explain each of
| | 02:48 | these reasons as they appeared.
| | 02:50 | You don't know exactly how long it's
going to take for each one, so to make the
| | 02:54 | timing of the animations fit your
narration, you need to have control, so you
| | 02:58 | can trigger each animation exactly when
you want it during the presentation, and
| | 03:01 | for that you need to change the events.
| | 03:03 | I'll go to the Animations panel, and
for each animation I can see the Event is
| | 03:09 | set to On Page Load.
| | 03:11 | So as soon as this page loads, the
animations will start and they'll keep
| | 03:14 | going until they're done.
| | 03:15 | I'm going to select all the
animations, and change it to On Page Click.
| | 03:23 | Notice that it didn't take away On
Page Load, so I have to go again to the
| | 03:27 | Events menu and turn off On Page Load.
| | 03:30 | Now On Page Click is the only event
that will trigger these animations.
| | 03:34 | Let's preview again. The slide appears but
none of the reasons will appear until I click.
| | 03:39 | So I can talk over each point for as long
as I want, and then move on to the next one.
| | 03:44 | Looks like I need to fix
some of the order there.
| | 03:47 | Let's go back to the Timing, I'll
move world class teaching and support
| | 03:52 | staff back up to the top, where it belongs,
and State-of-the-Art Facilities fourth again.
| | 03:59 | Now let's preview.
| | 04:09 | And they all appear as I want them to.
| | 04:11 | Animating a list in a presentation can
make it more interesting for people to read.
| | 04:15 | It can also help you control the speed
and delivery of the information to help
| | 04:19 | your audience better understand it.
| | 04:22 | The Timing panel and the Events menu in
the Animation panel are your tools for
| | 04:26 | customizing the order and
triggers for your animations.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating navigation buttons| 00:00 | So far we've seen how to create a
few different ways of navigating an
| | 00:04 | interactive document with things
like arrow buttons and clickable
| | 00:07 | hyperlink tables of contents.
| | 00:09 | Let's look at another navigation system.
| | 00:12 | This time we'll make one that contains
clickable thumbnails of each page and a
| | 00:15 | sliding drawer that we can access at any time.
| | 00:19 | To create this sliding navigation
system we're going to create buttons and
| | 00:22 | combine them with animation.
| | 00:24 | So I'm going to go to my navigation
master page and make sure that I'm on the
| | 00:27 | Navigation layer, so I'm on N-Nav and
I have the Navigation layer selected.
| | 00:32 | I've set up a few things in advance
here and the first thing is I went to my
| | 00:37 | Preferences by pressing Command+K or
Ctrl+K, and I went down to Guides &
| | 00:42 | Pasteboard and I increased the
Vertical Margin here to 400 pixels.
| | 00:45 | That was to give me enough pasteboard
room to construct the drawer that I want
| | 00:49 | to underneath the document.
| | 00:52 | That's this thing down here.
| | 00:53 | I also created this black frame and
this little icon here of a computer screen.
| | 00:59 | To start making the thumbnails, I'm
going to press the F key on my keyboard to
| | 01:03 | get my Rectangle Frame tool.
| | 01:04 | And I'm going to follow out these
guides that I drew, trace all along there.
| | 01:09 | And before I let go over the Bounce
button, I'm going to tap the up arrow key on
| | 01:13 | my keyboard to give me two frames, one
stacked on top of the other, and then I'm
| | 01:16 | going to press the right key on my
keyboard so I get 10 frames in all.
| | 01:21 | Then I'll let go of my mouse key and
those are the frames for my page thumbnails.
| | 01:27 | For the thumbnails, I've previously
exported this document to a PDF and I'll
| | 01:31 | place the pages of that PDF into these frames.
| | 01:34 | I'll press Command+D or Ctrl+D to bring
up the Place dialog box and in the Links
| | 01:39 | folder I'll scroll down
until I get to RouxSlideshow.pdf.
| | 01:45 | I'll hold the Shift key on the keyboard
and click Open, and by holding the Shift
| | 01:48 | key I get the Place options
where I can select all pages.
| | 01:52 | I'll click OK, and now I just have to click to
place each of the thumbnails into these frames.
| | 02:00 | There they are, I'll select them all.
| | 02:04 | In the Control panel I'll click on
Center, and Fill frame proportionally, and
| | 02:10 | there are my thumbnails.
| | 02:12 | Now I have to make each of these
thumbnails into buttons, so I'll open the
| | 02:15 | Buttons and Forms panel, I'll click
on my first thumbnail, and in the Type
| | 02:20 | menu I'll choose Button.
| | 02:21 | I'll give it a name, page 1, and the
Event will be On Release or Tap, and the
| | 02:27 | Action, Go to Page, Page 1.
| | 02:31 | Now I want this button to be dimmed
until I rollover it, that's why I imported
| | 02:35 | all these pages with the transparent
background so you can see the black
| | 02:39 | background through the page.
| | 02:40 | But now I'll click on Rollover to
create a rollover state and I'll add a fill.
| | 02:45 | So up in the Control panel, I'll select
Fill, fill it with Paper and just to add
| | 02:51 | a little special effect I'll go to
the Effects menu and choose Outer Glow.
| | 02:56 | And for the Swatch, instead of
paper I'll choose this orange color.
| | 03:02 | And to make it really visible, I'll
increase the Opacity all the way to 100% and
| | 03:07 | I'll set the size to 20 pixels.
| | 03:09 | And I'll also increase the
spread a little bit, say to 20%.
| | 03:13 | All these settings will just make that
outer glow even more intense, and click OK.
| | 03:18 | If you'd like to know more about
creating special effects like this in InDesign,
| | 03:22 | check out my course InDesign FX in
the lynda.com online training library.
| | 03:26 | So now that I've setup the first
button I need to repeat that process for
| | 03:30 | the remaining buttons.
| | 03:31 | Now I've finished setting up each of
the buttons, now I want to animate this
| | 03:35 | whole navigation system so it
stays out of sight until I want it.
| | 03:39 | So I'll select everything and group it,
and I'll go to the Animation panel
| | 03:45 | and choose the Preset, Move Left.
| | 03:50 | The Event will be On Roll Over (Self),
and remember to turn off On Page Load,
| | 03:57 | and I'll select Reverse on Roll Off, so
the animation will play backwards when I
| | 04:01 | roll off and slide the
drawer back down and out of sight.
| | 04:05 | And I want this to happen pretty
quickly, so I'll set the duration to a
| | 04:08 | quarter of a second.
| | 04:09 | You might be wondering why I set the
animation to Move Left when I want the
| | 04:13 | drawer to slide up from the bottom?
| | 04:15 | Well I did this just to give me a
motion path to work with, so I can customize
| | 04:19 | exactly how far the drawer moves.
| | 04:21 | If I chose one of the other
animations like Fly in from Bottom, there's no
| | 04:25 | motion path to customize.
| | 04:26 | But when I choose Move Left I get a motion path.
| | 04:30 | So I'll select the motion path by
clicking on it with my Selection tool,
| | 04:33 | I'll press A on my keyboard to get my
Direct Selection tool, and now I can
| | 04:38 | reshape the motion path.
| | 04:39 | And what I'm going to do is drag it
straight up to about right here, where this
| | 04:44 | point is at 600 pixels.
| | 04:47 | I'll preview the document and now when
I rollover the icon, the drawer slides
| | 04:53 | up, when I mouse over each page, I get the
glow, and I can click to navigate to that page.
| | 05:01 | One of the best things about creating a
navigation system for your interactive
| | 05:04 | documents is the flexibility you have.
| | 05:07 | With different button actions,
animation events and timing, you can really
| | 05:11 | create just about any kind of
navigation system you can imagine.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a multi-state object | 00:00 | When you want to include a slideshow
in your interactive document, one of the
| | 00:04 | best tools to use is a multi-state object.
| | 00:07 | So here I have a document that's an
artist portfolio, and I'd like to create a
| | 00:11 | slideshow where I can click buttons
to view each piece of the portfolio.
| | 00:15 | And each piece consists of a placed
image of a painting, plus a caption with a
| | 00:20 | description of the painting.
| | 00:22 | And to accomplish this I am going to
include them all in a multi-state object,
| | 00:26 | and turn these little triangles here
into buttons to navigate through the
| | 00:28 | multi-state object and play the slideshow.
| | 00:31 | If I look at my Layers panel, I can see
that I've organized this document into
| | 00:36 | few different layers;
| | 00:37 | buttons, extra images,
images and the background.
| | 00:39 | If I tip open images, I have four
different objects here that correspond to groups.
| | 00:45 | If I move one you can see what it is,
it's the painting plus the description.
| | 00:50 | I'll just undo, and I've named each one
of these for the names of the paintings.
| | 00:56 | To make my multi-state object, I want
to select everything on the images layer.
| | 00:59 | So I am going to click to the right
on the little green square and that
| | 01:03 | selects all the objects.
| | 01:04 | Now I'll go to my Object States panel
and click on the button down the bottom to
| | 01:09 | convert it to a multi-state object.
| | 01:11 | I'll give it a name, under
Object Name, I'll call it Portfolio.
| | 01:15 | And I can click on each one in
the panel to see each state of the
| | 01:18 | multi-state object. So each of one
of these will correspond to one of the
| | 01:23 | states in the slideshow.
| | 01:24 | If I want to change the order, I can
just drag any one of these objects up or
| | 01:27 | down inside the panel.
| | 01:29 | You can have as many objects as you
want in a state and you can have as many
| | 01:33 | states in the multi-state object as
you want, but the trick is only one state
| | 01:37 | can be visible at a time.
| | 01:39 | And there are three different levels
of selections that you can have in a
| | 01:41 | multi-state object, and the Object States
panel will indicate exactly what you have selected.
| | 01:47 | So if I don't have any multi-state
object selected, the panel is empty.
| | 01:50 | If I select a multi-state object, I see
the different states, and up here I can
| | 01:55 | see this icon telling me that I have
the entire multi-state object selected.
| | 02:00 | I can also see that down at the bottom of
the panel where it says all states selected.
| | 02:04 | So if I want to move or transform
everything in all states, I can do that right now.
| | 02:08 | For example, if I wanted to scale down
the entire slideshow, I could go to the
| | 02:12 | Control panel and change the Size.
| | 02:14 | So I'll go down to 75%.
| | 02:18 | And I can click through and see the
different states were also scaled.
| | 02:22 | I'll undo a couple of times to
just go back, so it's 100% size.
| | 02:27 | What if I wanted to just
make a change to one state?
| | 02:29 | Well then I can click on that state in the
panel, and see how the icon changed over here?
| | 02:35 | This tells me that I have just one
state selected and I also see an indicator
| | 02:38 | right here to the right.
| | 02:41 | And at the bottom of the
panel it tells me State selected.
| | 02:44 | So if I move objects in this
state the others are unaffected.
| | 02:47 | So I can slide this painting over,
and then if I switch to the other
| | 02:50 | states, they haven't moved.
| | 02:53 | I'll undo to put that state back where
it was, and I can also select a single
| | 02:57 | object within a state by double
-clicking on it in the layout.
| | 03:01 | So for example, if I double-click and I
can select just the painting but not the
| | 03:05 | caption, and then I could transform it,
rotate it or whatever, and you see that
| | 03:10 | the caption is not rotated.
| | 03:11 | I get a little feedback in the panel too,
now the square is filled in and at the
| | 03:16 | bottom it tells me Object
in state selected, I'll undo.
| | 03:20 | I can add objects to a state by
cutting or copying them to my clipboard and
| | 03:24 | either right-clicking on the state and
choosing paste into state, or using the
| | 03:30 | button at the bottom of the panel.
| | 03:32 | I can remove a state from a multi-
state object by selecting it and
| | 03:36 | right-clicking on it and choosing Delete.
| | 03:41 | I'll cancel out of there.
| | 03:42 | Or I could also click on the trashcan
at the bottom of the panel to delete
| | 03:46 | that selected state.
| | 03:47 | I can also add a state to a multi-state object;
| | 03:50 | say I wanted to add another
painting to the portfolio.
| | 03:52 | If I go to my Layers panel, in the extra
images layer, I actually have just such a thing.
| | 03:58 | I have another painting and another description.
| | 04:00 | I'd like to add this Smirched
object to my multi-state object.
| | 04:05 | Well I'll go to the Object States panel,
I am going to click and drag to select
| | 04:09 | both the painting I want to add to the
multi-state object and the multi-state
| | 04:13 | object itself, and I get
some instructions in the panel.
| | 04:16 | I have three options.
| | 04:18 | First, I can click the Add button to
insert this new group into the Visible
| | 04:22 | state, or I can click the New button
to add each object I have selected as a
| | 04:27 | separate new state in the
current multi-state object.
| | 04:30 | Or third, I can Option+Click or Alt+
Click and add all the selected objects
| | 04:34 | together into one new state in
the current multi-state object.
| | 04:38 | Since I have just one group selected,
there is no difference between clicking on
| | 04:41 | the New button and Option+Clicking or Alt
+Clicking on it, so I'll just click it,
| | 04:47 | and now I see I have a new
state in my multi-state object.
| | 04:50 | Now let's make this a working
slideshow by adding some controls to it.
| | 04:53 | That's what these triangles up here were for.
| | 04:55 | I'll select the one pointing to the right and
I'll go to the Buttons panel and click Button.
| | 05:04 | I'll give it a name,
we'll just call it next state.
| | 05:08 | I'll add an Action > Go To Next State
and it chooses the Object, Portfolio, and I
| | 05:16 | have the option to Stop it at the Last
State or I can make it so clicking again
| | 05:20 | will loop back around to the
beginning of the slideshow.
| | 05:23 | I'll leave this unselected for now.
| | 05:26 | I'll select the other
arrow and repeat the process.
| | 05:31 | I'll just call this one previous, Action > Go
To Previous State and the Object is Portfolio.
| | 05:40 | Let's preview our slideshow, and when I
click one of the triangles, I go to the
| | 05:50 | next state in the multi-state
object and I play the slideshow.
| | 05:55 | Another thing to know about multi-
state objects is that when you output a
| | 05:58 | document to print or PDF, only the
visible state of a multi-state object is
| | 06:03 | included in the output.
| | 06:04 | So if you have multi-state objects in
your documents, be sure to check which
| | 06:08 | state is visible before you output.
| | 06:11 | Multi-state objects are great for
slideshows, but you can probably think of more
| | 06:14 | uses for them in your documents.
| | 06:16 | Anytime you want to add interactivity
to control the visibility of multiple
| | 06:20 | objects, consider using a multi-state object.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a page number indicator | 00:00 | In a previous movie, I showed how to
create a navigation system for a document
| | 00:04 | where you can roll over an area to make
a set of thumbnail pages appear and then
| | 00:08 | you can click on one of those
thumbnails to navigate to that page.
| | 00:11 | Another thing you might want to add
to that navigation system is a page
| | 00:14 | number indicator, especially if your
document has a large number of pages or
| | 00:19 | if the pages all look similar to one
another, making it hard to see exactly
| | 00:22 | which one you're clicking on.
| | 00:24 | You want your presentation to come
across as smooth and professional as
| | 00:27 | possible, so you don't want to be hunting
around struggling to find the right page.
| | 00:31 | In this document, let's just confirm
that we're on the navigation master and the
| | 00:36 | navigation layer, and what I've setup
here is a series of text frames really big
| | 00:41 | with easy-to-read numbers, and
underneath them is a frame with no stroke and no
| | 00:46 | fill, and what I want is each one of
these indicators to pop-up when I mouse over
| | 00:51 | the page number thumbnails.
| | 00:52 | The frame with no stroke and no
fill will allow me to hide all the page
| | 00:55 | numbers, as we'll see.
| | 00:57 | So everything here sits high enough up on
the page, so it's out of the way when the
| | 01:02 | thumbnail slide up into view from the
bottom, and if I go to the Layers panel, I
| | 01:05 | can see that they're all going to
be on this Page Indicators layer.
| | 01:09 | So I'll select everything on the Page
Indicators layer by clicking on the button
| | 01:12 | on the right, and now I'm going to
create a multi-state object from these.
| | 01:17 | So I'll go to my Object States panel,
click on New, and now I have States that
| | 01:22 | correspond to each one of the page
numbers, plus the empty State, which is now
| | 01:27 | State 11, but let's rename that. We'll
call that none, and we'll drag it up to
| | 01:34 | the top, and let's give this a good
name, we'll call it page indicators.
| | 01:41 | Now let's attach this to our thumbnail
buttons down below, so I'll select my
| | 01:46 | first button. I'll go to the Buttons
and Forms panel and right now this button
| | 01:51 | has one Action on the Event On Release
or Tap, it'll take me to Page 1. So I
| | 01:56 | want to set a Rollover Action, so when
I roll over this thumbnail that big Page
| | 02:00 | 1 Page Indicator appears, so I'll choose
Event > On Roll Over, Action > Go To State
| | 02:08 | of my page indicator multi-state
object, go to State 1, and then to make it
| | 02:15 | disappear when I roll off of the
thumbnail, I'll choose another Event On Roll
| | 02:19 | Off, Action > Go To State, go to that
none state, which again, has no stroke and
| | 02:26 | no fill, so we'll hide the page number.
| | 02:28 | Now I'm going to repeat this process
for the other thumbnails and now that I
| | 02:33 | have setup all the
thumbnail buttons, let's preview.
| | 02:39 | So I can mouse over the icon, show my
page thumbnails, and as I mouse over each
| | 02:43 | one, the big page number appears.
| | 02:46 | When I roll off, it disappears.
| | 02:48 | Page number indicators are just
another feature you can build into your
| | 02:51 | files that adds a little polish
and will ensure a presentation works as
| | 02:55 | smoothly as possible.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Animating an opening page | 00:00 | When you're doing a presentation, it's
sometimes a good idea to try and make a
| | 00:04 | bold start to really get your audience's
attention and get them excited for what
| | 00:08 | you're about to say.
| | 00:09 | By combining multiple animations, you can make
a dynamic opening page for your presentation.
| | 00:15 | And here I have the opening page for
my presentation and these images all
| | 00:18 | correspond to each of the
eight themes of the presentation.
| | 00:21 | And I'd like to use them to
make a really striking opener.
| | 00:25 | And the idea that I had was to make
each photo start out in the center here,
| | 00:29 | behind the Roux logo, and grow
and move to their current positions.
| | 00:33 | If I look at my Layers panel, in the
Images layer, I can see each one of these
| | 00:40 | placed photos along with their Roux
Academy logo sitting on top, which is locked,
| | 00:45 | so it doesn't get in my way.
| | 00:46 | I'm going to select each of the images,
go to my Animations panel and I'm going
| | 00:52 | to choose the preset Move and
Scale > Move Right and Shrink.
| | 00:57 | I'll leave it Set To On Page Load and
I'll leave the Duration of 1 second.
| | 01:02 | Why did I choose Move Right and Shrink
when I actually want these to grow out of
| | 01:06 | the middle of my page?
| | 01:08 | Because I'm going to use Animate To
Current Appearance, so I'm going to switch
| | 01:13 | from Current Appearance, To Current Appearance.
| | 01:16 | Everything is sort of backwards here;
actually these are going to move left and grow.
| | 01:21 | Next I want them to fade in as they
move, but remember that since we're using
| | 01:25 | To Current Appearance, we have to
choose the opposite of what we want, so
| | 01:29 | we're going to choose Fade Out, and for Visibility,
we'll have them Hidden Until Animated.
| | 01:35 | Next, we need to change the
motion paths for these photos.
| | 01:38 | If I click on one with my Selection
tool, you can see the motion path and it
| | 01:43 | ends in the center of the photo, so
it's going to end up at this location, but
| | 01:47 | right now it's going to start out
out here, and I want it to come from the
| | 01:51 | center of the Roux logo.
| | 01:52 | So I'll click on it once with my
Selection tool and press the A key on my
| | 01:56 | keyboard to get the Direct Selection
tool, and that way I can click and select
| | 02:00 | just this end point and move it into
position, centered right on the Roux logo.
| | 02:04 | So now this animation will
follow this path out to there.
| | 02:07 | I'll repeat that for the other photos.
| | 02:11 | Now let's preview this page, and that's
an interesting effect, I have a little
| | 02:23 | bit of cleanup work to do to get the
timing right, because this one came in
| | 02:27 | second to last, instead of last.
| | 02:28 | And I might also want to work on the timings,
so they all come out at once. So let's fix that.
| | 02:34 | First of all, I'll go to the Timing
panel. I'll drag number 6 before number
| | 02:37 | 7. I'll select all the
animations and click on Play together.
| | 02:44 | Now let's preview again, and there you go.
| | 02:48 | That's a pretty striking opener. They
all play simultaneously and they all come
| | 02:52 | out of that Roux logo.
| | 02:53 | You could do other things in this situation too.
| | 02:56 | You might experiment with other
shapes for the motion path or changing the
| | 02:59 | duration of some of the animations, so
they come out of the logo at different speeds.
| | 03:03 | You can have a lot of fun coming up with
creative animation effects to start off
| | 03:07 | your presentation with a bang.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a multi-purpose button| 00:00 | Buttons are a key tool for
creating interactive documents.
| | 00:03 | One of the most useful things you can do
with the button is to use it to show or
| | 00:07 | hide buttons, including itself.
| | 00:09 | By making self-hiding buttons, you can
create something that looks like a single
| | 00:12 | button that changes its appearance and
changes other objects in your document.
| | 00:17 | Let's see how it's done.
| | 00:18 | So here I have a simple
document with two sets of paintings.
| | 00:21 | Set 1 at the top and Set 2 beneath,
and what I want to do is create a button
| | 00:26 | that I can click on to show Set 1 and
then when Set 1 is displayed the button
| | 00:30 | changes, so it says Show Set 2.
| | 00:32 | And then if I click on it, it shows Set 2.
| | 00:35 | I can't actually do this with one
button, but I can create the same effect,
| | 00:38 | nonetheless, just with two
buttons in the same spot on the page.
| | 00:42 | Each button will control the
visibility of the art and itself.
| | 00:46 | So to do this, we need to make buttons
out of everything we want to show and hide.
| | 00:50 | So I'll select the first group of art, go
to my Buttons panel and make it a button.
| | 00:54 | I'll call it Set 1, and I'll
select Hidden Until Triggered.
| | 01:01 | I'll do the same for the second set.
| | 01:05 | Make it a button, call this one Set 2
and Hidden Until Triggered, then I'll
| | 01:11 | select the text frame, I'll copy it
to my clipboard, and now with it still
| | 01:16 | selected in the layout, I'll make it a button.
| | 01:20 | I'll call this button set 1 trigger.
| | 01:23 | Now I'll choose Edit > Paste in Place,
so I paste that other copy of the text
| | 01:28 | frame I just copied to my clipboard
and I'll double-click to change the text,
| | 01:32 | so it says Show Set 2.
| | 01:34 | I'll press Escape to select the frame and
I'll make it a button and call it set 2
| | 01:38 | trigger, and I'll set this one
to be Hidden Until Triggered.
| | 01:45 | Now I'll Command+Click or Ctrl+Click to
select the set 1 trigger button that's
| | 01:49 | underneath the set 2 trigger.
| | 01:51 | So I can see I have the right one
selected up here, and I'll assign some Actions.
| | 01:56 | I'll choose Show/Hide Buttons and Forms,
and so the set 1 trigger is going to
| | 02:00 | show set 1, hide set 2, hide the set
1 trigger, and show the set 2 trigger.
| | 02:09 | Again, I'll Command+Click or Ctrl+Click,
now I have the set 2 trigger button
| | 02:13 | selected for the Action
Show/Hide Buttons and Forms.
| | 02:18 | The set 2 trigger is going to show set 2, hide
set 1, show the set 1 trigger and hide itself.
| | 02:26 | Now let's preview.
| | 02:28 | So I see the Show Set 1 button, I can
click on it, it hides itself, shows the set
| | 02:33 | 2 trigger, and it shows the set 1 art.
| | 02:37 | Now let's click again, and the second
set of art is shown and now I see the
| | 02:41 | set 1 trigger again.
| | 02:43 | So I can keep going
back and forth if I want to.
| | 02:47 | Another use for something like this
would be a question and answer scenario;
| | 02:50 | you could have two buttons that control
the visibility of the answer and themselves.
| | 02:54 | When you need to control the
visibility of objects on the page with buttons,
| | 02:58 | remember that a button can also hide itself.
| | 03:00 | So by positioning self-hiding buttons on
top of one another, you can create what
| | 03:04 | looks like a single button, but it's
actually multiple buttons that toggles the
| | 03:08 | visibility of other objects in the layout.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting your presentation and embedded fonts to SWF| 00:01 | Once you're done designing and
building your presentation file, you need to
| | 00:04 | export it to the Flash Player format,
also known as SWF; if you've included
| | 00:07 | things that InDesign can only export to SWF.
| | 00:10 | This includes things like animations and
multi-state objects. You can still have
| | 00:14 | animations and multi-state objects in
interactive PDF, but the first step is to
| | 00:18 | export to SWF, then place this SWF
back in InDesign, and then export a PDF.
| | 00:23 | So let's look at the
first step, exporting to SWF.
| | 00:26 | So here I have my presentation document
and it includes animations that have to
| | 00:30 | be output in SWF format in order to work.
| | 00:32 | So I'm going to press Command+E or
Ctrl+E to export, I'll export it to the
| | 00:36 | Desktop, Flash Player SWF format, and
click Save. We'll look at the General options.
| | 00:43 | First of all, if I had selected
objects on the page I could export just
| | 00:47 | to Selection to SWF.
| | 00:48 | I can export the whole document, or a range
of pages, and new in CS6 is the ability
| | 00:53 | to export just a specific layout,
but in this case, I'll export all pages.
| | 00:58 | I can have InDesign generate an HTML
file and view the SWF immediately after
| | 01:02 | exporting. So I'll leave those
selected now, and I can also scale it.
| | 01:07 | If you build your presentation to the size
you want to output it, then choose 100% for scale.
| | 01:11 | In this case, I'm going to scale it down a
little bit, say to 75% just to fit it on my screen.
| | 01:17 | In other cases you could fit it to a
specific screen size or you could specify
| | 01:21 | any width and height that you want,
but again, I'm going to choose 75% now.
| | 01:25 | For the Background I can
have Paper Color or Transparent.
| | 01:28 | Notice that when I select Transparent, I
can no longer have Page Transitions. I'm
| | 01:32 | going to select Paper Color and since
we've gone to the trouble of building
| | 01:37 | interactivity into our file,
we'll be sure to include it.
| | 01:39 | For Page Transitions, I can use
the ones built into the document.
| | 01:42 | I can remove them or I can override
them with any of the Page Transitions. I'll
| | 01:47 | keep From Document, and I can also
decide if I want to have Interactive Page
| | 01:51 | Curl, where users can click and drag the
corner of the page to make it look like
| | 01:54 | they're turning a piece of paper.
Let's look at the Advanced options.
| | 01:59 | The first option is Frame Rate. 24
frames per second is the default and it's
| | 02:03 | suitable for most SWF output.
| | 02:05 | You can specify a higher frame rate to
get smoother animations, but doing so
| | 02:09 | will increase the file size of your SWF.
| | 02:11 | For Text, you have three options:
Flash Classic Text, Convert to Outlines
| | 02:15 | or Convert to Pixels.
| | 02:16 | Flash Classic Text will keep the
text as live text and use real fonts.
| | 02:20 | If you export this way you also have the
information at the bottom of the dialog
| | 02:24 | box about which fonts will be embedded
in the SWF, and there is button you can
| | 02:28 | click to get more information about the
end-user license for that font, to see
| | 02:32 | if embedding in the SWF is
permitted under your license.
| | 02:34 | You also have options to rasterize your
pages, make them into a static picture,
| | 02:38 | and to Flatten Transparency, but
don't select either of these if you have
| | 02:42 | interactivity, because it won't work.
| | 02:44 | Under Image Handling, you have choices for
JPEG, PNG or you can let InDesign decide.
| | 02:50 | You also have a choice of
JPEG quality and resolution.
| | 02:54 | Typically, the defaults of JPEG, high
quality and 72 pixels per inch, will result
| | 02:59 | in a good looking on-screen presentation.
| | 03:00 | All right, let's click OK, and have
InDesign export the SWF. It opens in my web
| | 03:08 | browser, the animations play,
and the navigation controls work.
| | 03:15 | Another thing to remember about the
settings in the SWF Export dialog box is
| | 03:19 | that those are the same settings that
will be used in the SWF Preview panel.
| | 03:23 | So the changes I make in the Export
dialog box will be used for all documents
| | 03:27 | that I preview in the SWF Preview panel.
| | 03:29 | Likewise, if I make changes to the
preview settings, those will be what I see
| | 03:33 | next time I open the SWF Export dialog box.
| | 03:35 | So let's just go back to InDesign and
take a quick look in the Preview panel,
| | 03:39 | and right here, Preview Settings. So
these will stay in sync with what you set
| | 03:44 | in the Export dialog box.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with transitions and animation| 00:00 | As we have seen throughout this course,
InDesign has a lot of great features for
| | 00:04 | adding interactivity to your documents.
| | 00:05 | Unfortunately, some of those features
are incompatible with each other, for
| | 00:10 | example, page transitions and animation.
| | 00:12 | It would seem natural that you might
want to combine the use of these two
| | 00:16 | features in the same file, but if you do,
you'll probably not like the result.
| | 00:19 | Let's see what happens when we
combine page transitions and animation.
| | 00:23 | So here is my presentation file and I
can see by the presence of these circled
| | 00:27 | icons that some animation has been applied.
| | 00:29 | So I'll select one of them, go to my
Animation panel and I can see that this Reason No.
| | 00:34 | is set to Fade In on Page Load.
| | 00:37 | If I select the Text Frame, that's
set to Fly in from Bottom on Page Load.
| | 00:41 | Let's add some transitions to this document.
| | 00:44 | So I'll go to that Page Transitions
panel and right now there are none in the
| | 00:47 | document, I'll select one, I'll choose
push with the direction of Up, and I can
| | 00:54 | preview. So each one of the pages as I
navigate to it, will push up from the
| | 00:59 | bottom, pushing the old page out of view.
| | 01:01 | I'll click on the icon in the bottom
right corner to apply this to all spreads,
| | 01:05 | and now let's export
this document to a SWF file.
| | 01:10 | I'll call it transitions, and in the
dialog box, I'll make sure that I export All
| | 01:17 | Pages, I'll Generate an HTML File,
I'll View the SWF after Exporting, and for
| | 01:23 | Page Transitions, I'll include
those from the document, and click OK.
| | 01:30 | So watch what happens when I navigate
to one of my pages. Did you see that?
| | 01:36 | When the page pushed up, both the
number and the text were fully visible and
| | 01:40 | then the animations played, the
number faded in and the text came up.
| | 01:44 | Let's watch another page.
| | 01:47 | So InDesign has to fully render the
page for the transition and then it will
| | 01:52 | play the animations that you created.
| | 01:54 | Now you might think you could fix this
by going back to InDesign and tweaking
| | 01:57 | some of your animation settings.
| | 01:59 | So let's go back to InDesign, we'll
look in the Animation panel and you
| | 02:03 | might think okay, well, maybe if I
change the event from On Page Load to On
| | 02:06 | Page Click, I'd have better
control over it, or if I hid the object by
| | 02:10 | changing the Visibility to Hide Until
Animated, but neither one of these is
| | 02:14 | going to solve the problem.
| | 02:16 | InDesign is still going to render a
fully-visible version of the page and then
| | 02:19 | it will play the animations.
| | 02:21 | It's just the way it works.
| | 02:22 | So the story here is that you can
have animations and you can have a page
| | 02:26 | transitions, but you can't
have them at the same time.
| | 02:29 | It's a frustrating limitation, but it's
good to be aware of, so you don't waste
| | 02:32 | time trying around it by
tweaking your animation settings.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Digital Publishing Suite (DPS), Part 1An overview of the DPS workflow and the publishing process| 00:01 | The Digital Publishing Suite, or DPS for
short, is Adobe's answer to the question
| | 00:06 | of how to publish to tablets like
Apple's iPad and Amazon's Kindle Fire.
| | 00:10 | In this video, I'll discuss the DPS
tools and outline the process of using them.
| | 00:14 | One of the first things to know about DPS
is that it comes in three separate editions;
| | 00:19 | although you use the same tools in
InDesign regardless of which edition you have.
| | 00:23 | The three editions are Enterprise
Edition, Professional Edition, and Single
| | 00:27 | Edition, and on Adobe's DPS web site,
you can view a detailed comparison chart.
| | 00:33 | The Enterprise Edition is aimed at
large global publishing companies.
| | 00:36 | It can be integrated with other
publishing systems, and it includes high-end
| | 00:40 | features that the other editions don't
offer, like in-depth analytics, and the
| | 00:44 | ability to customize the interface
of the application used to view DPS
| | 00:48 | publications, which is
called the Content Viewer.
| | 00:52 | The Enterprise Edition allows you to
sell single issues or subscriptions to a
| | 00:55 | publication through the Apple App
Store and the Kindle Fire Newsstand.
| | 01:00 | The cost of the Enterprise Edition
includes both a platform fee and a download
| | 01:04 | fee based on the number of downloads of
each publication purchased by customers.
| | 01:08 | The Professional Edition of DPS
is aimed at mid-size publishers.
| | 01:11 | Like the Enterprise Edition, it
allows publishers to sell single issues
| | 01:15 | or subscriptions through the app stores
and it includes access to analytics reports.
| | 01:20 | But you do not have the ability to
customize the Content Viewer with the
| | 01:23 | Professional Edition.
| | 01:25 | And like the Enterprise Edition, the
Professional Edition is available either as
| | 01:28 | a monthly subscription, or as an annual
purchase, and the cost includes both a
| | 01:33 | platform fee, and a download fee, based
on the number of downloads of each folio
| | 01:37 | file purchased by customers.
| | 01:40 | The Single Edition of DPS is aimed at
individual users and small companies.
| | 01:44 | It allows you to create a single
publication in what's called a Folio file for
| | 01:48 | the Apple App Store for a one time fee, and
there are no additional charges for downloads.
| | 01:53 | You can't publish to the Kindle Fire or
Android devices with the Single Edition.
| | 01:58 | As of this recording, the fee for the
Single Edition that you can submit to the
| | 02:01 | Apple's App Store is $395.
| | 02:05 | However, you can also get access to
the Single Edition with a membership to
| | 02:08 | Adobe's Creative Cloud service.
| | 02:11 | It's also worth noting that Mac OS
is required to use the Viewer Builder
| | 02:14 | application that bundles folio files
for you to submit to the App Store.
| | 02:18 | Now those are the three editions of DPS,
but you don't need to purchase any of
| | 02:22 | them to get started.
| | 02:23 | You can design and create folio files,
preview them on tablets like the iPad and
| | 02:27 | the Kindle Fire, and share folios with
other people, all with just InDesign, and
| | 02:31 | the DPS tools that you can
download and use for free.
| | 02:35 | So let's look at those tools
and the basic DPS workflow.
| | 02:38 | InDesign is at the center of the DPS workflow.
| | 02:41 | As always, it's where you create your layouts.
| | 02:43 | Overlays are the interactive elements
you can add to your DPS publications.
| | 02:47 | They are called overlays because
when you export an InDesign layout to a
| | 02:51 | folio, all the non-interactive items
are exported as a background image,
| | 02:55 | either a PDF, a JPEG, or a PNG, and
the interactive overlays sit on top of
| | 03:00 | that background image.
| | 03:01 | You manage overlays with a panel called
the Folio Overlays panel, and there are
| | 03:06 | eight kinds of interactivity
that you can add to a folio.
| | 03:09 | There are some differences in the
ways you have to go about creating
| | 03:12 | these various overlays.
| | 03:13 | For the first five that I mentioned:
hyperlink, slideshows, audio/video, pan and
| | 03:18 | zoom and scrollable frames, you first
create or place objects in InDesign and
| | 03:23 | then use the Folio Overlays panel to edit them.
| | 03:26 | For the other three: image sequences,
panoramas, and web content, you have to
| | 03:30 | first draw an empty frame, and then
use the Folio Overlays panel to place
| | 03:34 | content into that frame.
| | 03:36 | After you've added the interactivity
you want, you use the Folio Builder panel
| | 03:39 | to assemble content into articles, and
then assemble articles into an overall
| | 03:43 | package called the Folio.
| | 03:45 | You can then preview the folio with a
separate desktop application called the
| | 03:49 | Adobe Content Viewer, or you can also
preview folio on an iPad or other mobile
| | 03:53 | device by using the Adobe Content Viewer app.
| | 03:57 | With an Adobe ID, you can sign in to
the Folio producer web site, which is
| | 04:01 | part of acrobat.com and edit the Folio, and
share it with anyone else with an Adobe ID.
| | 04:07 | Finally, if you're a subscriber to the
Professional or Enterprise Edition, or if
| | 04:11 | you've purchased a Single Edition
license, you can publish your finished Folio
| | 04:15 | to places like the Apple App Store. All right,
| | 04:17 | now that we've taken a bird's eye view
of the process and the tools involved in
| | 04:21 | the DPS workflow, it's time to
start looking at the details.
| | 04:24 | We'll start by looking at the various
kinds of interactivity we can add to a
| | 04:28 | layout in the Folio Overlays panel.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating hyperlinks| 00:00 | For DPS projects you can use two
InDesign panels to build your hyperlinks;
| | 00:04 | the Hyperlinks panel and
the Buttons and Forms panel.
| | 00:07 | With them you can create links that
jump to web sites, to other articles, to
| | 00:12 | other pages within an article and more.
| | 00:14 | Just beware that not all button actions
and hyperlink types are supported in folios.
| | 00:19 | So let's start with using a
button to add hyperlinks to our folio.
| | 00:23 | I like two frames on this
first page to become hyperlinks.
| | 00:26 | I want this one on the right to go to
the Roux Academy homepage and I want the
| | 00:31 | one on the left to be used for
sending an email to the Admissions office.
| | 00:35 | So first of all, I'll start
out with one on the right.
| | 00:38 | I'll select it and in my Buttons and
Forms panel, I'm going to make it into a
| | 00:42 | button, I'll call it homepage.
| | 00:45 | The Event will be On Release or
Tap, and I'll choose Go To URL.
| | 00:51 | In the URL field, I'll type in
rouxacademy.com and with the button selected I
| | 00:57 | can go to the Folio Overlays
panel to set a couple of options.
| | 01:02 | First, I can specify whether this
hyperlink opens in the folio or in a web browser.
| | 01:07 | So on the iPad I can have this
hyperlink either open in the publication or in
| | 01:11 | Safari, and if I choose to have it open in
Safari I can have it ask me first if that's okay.
| | 01:17 | For now I'll say Open in Folio and
we'll setup our second hyperlink.
| | 01:22 | So I'll select, Questions email us.
| | 01:25 | In the Buttons and Forms panel, I'll
click on the plus sign, Go To URL and for
| | 01:30 | this URL I'll type the mailto protocol.
| | 01:36 | And I'll give it a name, email.
| | 01:39 | Now let's preview the
hyperlinks to make sure they work.
| | 01:42 | But before I can do that I need to
update the article in the Folio Builder
| | 01:46 | panel, otherwise it won't see
the changes that I just made.
| | 01:49 | So I'll go to the Folio Builder panel,
I'll select this article and in the Panel
| | 01:54 | menu I'll choose Update.
| | 01:57 | Now this will work since in this case
I'm only previewing hyperlinks that go to
| | 02:01 | things outside my folio;
| | 02:02 | things like URLs and email addresses, so
I don't have to preview the whole folio.
| | 02:07 | If that were the case, I would have to
go up one level and preview the folio
| | 02:11 | instead of the article.
| | 02:12 | Now I'll preview, it opens in the
Content Viewer and I can navigate to the Roux
| | 02:20 | Academy web page and I can email them.
| | 02:26 | Buttons are great for hyperlinks but
sometimes you don't want to click on a
| | 02:29 | frame, you might want to just click on
the specific piece of text, for that you
| | 02:33 | use the Hyperlinks panel.
| | 02:34 | So let's try that now.
| | 02:36 | I'll go back to InDesign and I'll go to
the page with the full course listing,
| | 02:41 | right here, and I want these words
right here to be a hyperlink to Page 5.
| | 02:46 | So I'll double-click and I'll select
all of them and I'll open my Hyperlinks
| | 02:52 | panel, and down at the bottom
I'll click on New Hyperlink.
| | 02:57 | I'll choose Link To Page, and
choose Page 5 and click OK.
| | 03:03 | By the way, don't bother trying to
create a hyperlink to a text anchor
| | 03:06 | destination because they're
not supported in this case.
| | 03:09 | I'm going to go on next page and I have
another frame that I'd like to be a hyperlink.
| | 03:14 | I'll select it and in this case I want it to
be a link to another article within my folio.
| | 03:20 | So I'll go to my Buttons panel, I'll
make it a button, I'll give it a name
| | 03:25 | reasons, and the Event will be Go To URL,
and where it says URL I have to change http:
| | 03:34 | to navto, and after the slashes I have
to type in the name of the article which
| | 03:43 | in this case is reasons and the page number.
| | 03:48 | So I'll type number and then the
Page numbering is a little funny in DPS.
| | 03:52 | The first page number of a
DPS article starts at zero.
| | 03:55 | So if I want to go to the first page of
the reason article I type in 0 here and
| | 04:00 | press Return or Enter.
| | 04:01 | Now I'd like to review these
hyperlinks to make sure they work, but again,
| | 04:05 | before I can do that I need to
remember to update the articles, otherwise I
| | 04:10 | won't see the changes that I've just made.
| | 04:12 | So back to the Folio
Builder panel, update the article.
| | 04:18 | Since I want to test a hyperlink
between articles, I can't just preview a single
| | 04:22 | article, I have to preview the folio.
| | 04:25 | So I'll go up one level to the
Folio level and I'll preview.
| | 04:34 | I'll scroll to the page where I've put
the first hyperlink and test it out, it
| | 04:39 | jumps to that page, I'll go back to
the beginning and then I'll test that
| | 04:45 | hyperlink in between articles.
| | 04:49 | There's one other thing to note about
using hyperlinks in DPS Overlays, you can
| | 04:53 | add hyperlinks in
scrollable frames but that's it.
| | 04:56 | Hyperlinks in slideshows or other
interactive overlays aren't supported yet.
| | 05:00 | Adding hyperlinks to your DPS project
is a fairly straightforward process,
| | 05:04 | especially if you already used to
working with hyperlinks in InDesign.
| | 05:07 | Just remember when you're adding or
editing hyperlinks to update the article
| | 05:11 | before you preview it, and be sure to
preview the folio if you're linking from
| | 05:15 | one article to another.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating slideshows| 00:00 | Adding a slideshow overlay to your DPS
Project is a classic way to bring a page
| | 00:04 | alive with interactivity and if you
know how to work with multi-state objects,
| | 00:08 | you already know the keys to making a slideshow.
| | 00:10 | So here we've a simple document that I'd
like to include in the DPS Project with
| | 00:14 | a slideshow that displays the eight
reasons it's great to study at Roux Academy.
| | 00:18 | Every slide I want to show both a photo
and a text frame under it for the title.
| | 00:23 | In order to create a slideshow that
works in the DPS Folio, I need to use a
| | 00:27 | multi-state object, where each state
shows one of the slides in the slideshow.
| | 00:31 | And what I've done in advance here is to
create a slideshow layer in my document.
| | 00:35 | So I'll go to my Layers panel and I
can see slideshow, I'll tip it open and I
| | 00:39 | have groups, I've named each one of
them for States, so State 1 through State 8,
| | 00:44 | and in each group there's a photo and a
text frame with the title of the photo.
| | 00:49 | So I want to select all of these, I'll
click this square on the right side of
| | 00:53 | layer and now with them all selected,
I can make a multi-state object.
| | 00:56 | So I'll go to my Object States panel,
I'll click New, and there you can see the
| | 01:01 | 8 States that will be the slides in
my slideshow and let's give it a name,
| | 01:05 | we'll call it slideshow.
| | 01:09 | Now I'd like to add some buttons that
the user can tap to advance the slideshow.
| | 01:13 | I have these two triangles underneath the
photos and I'm going to convert them to buttons.
| | 01:18 | So I'll select the one on the right,
go to the Buttons panel, I'll click
| | 01:21 | Actions and I'll choose Go To Next State, of the
Object slideshow, and I'll just give it a name.
| | 01:29 | You should always give descriptive
names to our buttons. So that's next.
| | 01:33 | I'll select the left triangle, I'll
choose Go To Previous State and we'll
| | 01:39 | call this previous.
| | 01:43 | Next I'm going to select my multi-
state object and I'm going to my Folio
| | 01:47 | Overlays panel, and you can see
slideshow has already picked for me.
| | 01:51 | So let's look at the options I have here.
| | 01:54 | I can set the slideshow to start
playing automatically when this page is viewed
| | 01:57 | by selecting Auto Play.
| | 01:59 | If I choose Auto Play, I can also
set a Delay, so it doesn't start
| | 02:02 | playing immediately.
| | 02:04 | The Interval is how long each slide is
visible, and I can also set a slideshow
| | 02:07 | to Loop, so it plays over and over.
| | 02:10 | Cross Fade creates a fade transition in
between slides and you can also set the
| | 02:14 | duration of that transition.
| | 02:16 | I can allow the user to swipe to change
the image, and if I do so, I can force
| | 02:20 | it to stop at the first and last.
| | 02:22 | I can have the slideshow be hidden until it
starts, and I can also make it play backwards.
| | 02:27 | The other main choice here is Tap to Play/Pause.
| | 02:31 | Notice that when I select that I can
still have Auto Play selected, so I can
| | 02:34 | have both of these options turned on.
| | 02:36 | That way the slideshow will start
automatically and the user can tap to pause
| | 02:39 | it, and then tap again to resume it.
| | 02:42 | If I turn both of these off, then the
all way the slideshow will advance is if I
| | 02:46 | set up buttons that control the
slideshow and then the user taps those buttons.
| | 02:50 | So let's preview this slideshow.
| | 02:56 | You can see starts playing automatically,
I can tap to pause it, then tap again
| | 03:01 | to resume it, and I can also use my
buttons to navigate forward and backwards.
| | 03:14 | You have lots of options in the
Folio Overlays panel for tweaking the
| | 03:17 | presentation of your slideshow.
| | 03:18 | Just remember to create a slideshow,
start with a multi-state object were each
| | 03:22 | state is a slide in the slideshow.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Image Sequence feature| 00:00 | With the image sequence overlay, you
can create an effect of viewing an object
| | 00:04 | or a scene from all sides. It's
like you're standing at the center of a
| | 00:07 | revolving turntable and the
scene passes all around you.
| | 00:10 | This effect is accomplished by
playing a series of images, one right after
| | 00:14 | another, which forms our progression like
frames in an animation or pages in a flipbook.
| | 00:19 | Let's see how it works.
| | 00:20 | So here's my document and I want
to add an image sequence to it.
| | 00:24 | On my hard drive I have a folder full
of images that I'm going to use for the
| | 00:29 | image sequence, so let's take a look at them.
| | 00:31 | I'll select the first few images and
open them in Preview, and as I view them, I
| | 00:35 | can see that they are indeed like
frames of film, they form a progression and
| | 00:39 | each one is a little bit
different than the previous one.
| | 00:42 | Now you might be wondering at this point,
how do you make a group of images like this?
| | 00:48 | Well, there are several
applications that can do this for you.
| | 00:50 | Adobe Photoshop Extended can export an
image sequence like this out of a 3D object.
| | 00:55 | If you just want to have frames of an
animation or video, you can use Adobe
| | 00:59 | Flash Professional or Adobe After
Effects, as well as other programs.
| | 01:03 | The key for our purposes here is to have
a single folder of image files that are
| | 01:07 | in PNG or JPEG format and
they have to be named properly.
| | 01:11 | They have to be named with the same
root name, followed by an ascending
| | 01:15 | sequence of numbers, so in this case I
have Vase_ followed by the numbers with
| | 01:19 | several leading 0s.
| | 01:21 | For a smooth animation you should have
at least 30 images in the sequence, but
| | 01:25 | you don't have to have a huge number.
Having too many images won't make the
| | 01:29 | animation any smoother, but it will
increase the file size of your folio, so
| | 01:32 | experiment and find the
right number for your project.
| | 01:35 | Now I'm going to go back to InDesign
and start building the image sequence.
| | 01:40 | I'll press Command+D or Ctrl+D to get
the Place dialog box and I'll just select
| | 01:44 | one of JPEGs and place it.
| | 01:49 | It's not necessary to do this step,
but I like it, because it helps me
| | 01:52 | automatically create the frame to the
exact dimensions of the image sequence.
| | 01:56 | I could just start with an
empty frame if I preferred.
| | 01:59 | Then to make it an Image Sequence
Overlay, I'll go to the Folio Overlays panel
| | 02:02 | and I'll choose Image Sequence.
| | 02:05 | At the top where it says Load Images,
I'll click on the folder icon and
| | 02:10 | navigate to my files,
| | 02:12 | Exercise Files > Links and the folder
at the bottom, Vase_Image_Sequence. I'll
| | 02:19 | click Open, and I can see the file path here.
| | 02:23 | Now let's look at the options
for an Image Sequence Overlay.
| | 02:26 | If I choose Show First Image Initially,
then the first image in the sequence
| | 02:30 | is used as the poster, or if I select
Play in Reverse down here at the bottom,
| | 02:34 | then the last image will be used as the
poster. I can select Auto Play to have
| | 02:39 | the image sequence be played as soon
as the page is viewed, but the image
| | 02:42 | sequence doesn't have to begin
immediately if I don't want to, because I can
| | 02:46 | set a delay to occur also.
| | 02:49 | I can set the speed in
terms of frames per second.
| | 02:51 | The speed can vary from one frame
per second up to 30 frames per second.
| | 02:56 | In the case of this vase image sequence,
I have 30 images, so if I set the speed
| | 03:00 | to 30 frames per second, the
entire sequence would take one second.
| | 03:04 | If I set the speed to 15 frames per
second, this sequence would take two seconds
| | 03:08 | to complete and the effect would be slower.
| | 03:11 | I can set the sequence to play a
specific number of times, or I could have it
| | 03:14 | loop endlessly, or I could
have it stop at the last image.
| | 03:18 | I can allow the person viewing the
image sequence to swipe to change the image,
| | 03:21 | and if so, I can have it stop at the
first and last image if I want to.
| | 03:26 | I can also allow the user to tap
to play and pause the image sequence.
| | 03:29 | Now that we know what these
options do, let's preview this.
| | 03:32 | I'm going to set it to Auto Play with a Delay
of 2 seconds, I'll enable Tap to Play/Pause.
| | 03:38 | I'll set the Speed to 30 frames per second,
I'll set it to Loop and I'll click Preview.
| | 03:47 | Once the Preview begins, there is a 2
second delay and there's my image sequence
| | 03:52 | showing me the 360 degree view of the vase.
| | 03:57 | Now this is way too fast for me. I
can't really appreciate the detail of
| | 04:00 | the vase or the background, I'm just
kind of getting dizzy, but I can tap
| | 04:03 | to play or pause it at any time, and if I want to
reset it to the beginning, I can double tap.
| | 04:10 | So let's slow this down. I'll go back
to the Folio Overlays panel and we'll
| | 04:15 | change the speed to 10 frames per
second that way the sequence will now take 3
| | 04:20 | seconds to complete one cycle.
| | 04:22 | I'll click Preview again, and there,
that's much nicer and the same controls
| | 04:31 | work to tap, to play and pause,
and double tap to reset it.
| | 04:38 | An image sequence can add a very
interesting and unique visual element to your
| | 04:42 | DPS folio, and it's not much more
difficult than placing a still image.
| | 04:46 | The keys are getting the images created
for the sequence in Photoshop or another
| | 04:50 | application, then naming them properly
and using the Folio Overlays panel to set
| | 04:54 | options for speed and other controls.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding audio and video | 00:00 | Working with audio and video in a DPS
Folio involves choosing the right media
| | 00:04 | format, placing it into your layout, and
then choosing play options in the Folio
| | 00:09 | Overlays panel and then
previewing to see how it works.
| | 00:12 | Here's my document, and I would like to
add some audio and some video to spice
| | 00:16 | it up, and it's easy to
remember which formats are best to use;
| | 00:20 | MP3 and MP4, MP3 for audio and
MP4 with H.264 encoding for video.
| | 00:26 | If you'd like to know more about using
the Adobe Media Encoder to convert to the
| | 00:30 | formats you need, see the
movie on that topic in this series.
| | 00:34 | On the first page, I've created a
slideshow for DPS with a multi-state object,
| | 00:38 | and I'd like to enhance that slideshow
with some Roux theme music that will play
| | 00:42 | when this page is viewed.
| | 00:44 | So I need to place the MP3.
| | 00:46 | I'll press Command or Ctrl+D to get
the Place dialog box, and in the Links
| | 00:50 | panel, I'll scroll down
until I see roux_theme_music.mp3.
| | 00:56 | Click Open, and I'll click
it to place it in my document.
| | 01:00 | Now right now this audio file has no
visual representation in the layout.
| | 01:04 | It has no posters selected, and
I'm actually not going to select one.
| | 01:08 | Instead, I'm going to go to the Folio
Overlays panel where I can select the Audio
| | 01:12 | and Video Overlay, and the first
option here is Controller Files.
| | 01:16 | If I click on the folder, I can navigate
and select a folder containing images I
| | 01:20 | want to be displayed when the music is playing.
| | 01:22 | In this case, I just want a
simple play and pause effect.
| | 01:25 | So while the music is playing, a Pause
icon is displayed, so people know they
| | 01:29 | can click to pause the music, and if
the music is paused, a Play icon is
| | 01:33 | displayed, so folks know they
can click that to play the music.
| | 01:37 | So let's navigate to that folder;
| | 01:39 | Exercise Files > Links and the folder
is AudioAssetControls, and if I open it,
| | 01:47 | you can see it contains two files;
| | 01:49 | AudioAsset_pause.png and AudioAsset_play.png.
| | 01:55 | I'll click Open and I'm going to
deselect Show First Image Initially in the
| | 01:59 | Folio Overlays panel.
| | 02:01 | I'll select Auto Play with no delay.
| | 02:04 | If I didn't select Auto Play, the audio
file would play when it was tapped. All right,
| | 02:08 | let's preview our page with
the audio file and the slideshow.
| | 02:15 | (audio playing)
| | 02:20 | And as soon as the page loads, the
slideshow starts, and so does the audio.
| | 02:25 | I can see my audio controller, and if I
tap it, it pauses the audio, and I can
| | 02:32 | tap it again to play the audio.
| | 02:34 | (audio playing)
| | 02:41 | Let's close the Content Viewer, and
we'll go to the next page in the document,
| | 02:45 | and place some video.
| | 02:47 | So again, I'll press Command or Ctrl+D
to get my Place dialog box, and in the
| | 02:51 | Links folder, I'll place roux_testimonial.mp4.
| | 02:58 | I'll click in the layout to place that,
and in the Folio Overlays panel I can
| | 03:02 | see my video options.
| | 03:04 | I can either set it to Auto
Play or have it play when tapped.
| | 03:07 | I could also create regular InDesign
buttons with actions to play, pause, or
| | 03:11 | stop either audio or video.
| | 03:14 | If I have the video set to Auto Play,
I can also set a delay, so it doesn't
| | 03:18 | start immediately when the page is viewed.
| | 03:20 | I can set it to play in line or full screen.
| | 03:22 | Either way, the video needs to be
sized properly for best results.
| | 03:26 | If it's going to be a full screen video,
and I'm targeting iPad 1 and 2, the
| | 03:30 | video should be 1024 pixels wide.
| | 03:33 | If I'm targeting iPad 3, the
video should be 2048 pixels wide.
| | 03:37 | If video is going to play in line, it
should be sized properly for that too.
| | 03:41 | For example, this one is 640 pixels by 360.
| | 03:44 | I also have the option
to Tap to View Controller.
| | 03:47 | With this selected, tapping the
video while it's playing makes the
| | 03:50 | Controller Bar appear.
| | 03:51 | If I don't select this, tapping the
video pauses the video, and then tapping it
| | 03:55 | while it's paused will restart it.
| | 03:57 | Let's set this to Auto Play with a
Delay of 2 seconds, and I'll select Tap
| | 04:02 | to View Controller.
| | 04:03 | Now, let's preview.
| | 04:09 | There's the delay and then
the video starts playing.
| | 04:13 | (video playing)
| | 04:16 | If I tap it, the controller appears,
and I can pause the video, I can scrub
| | 04:21 | ahead, I can mute and
unmute it, and play it again.
| | 04:25 | (video playing)
| | 04:32 | Now you might be wondering if it's
possible to stream audio and video from the
| | 04:35 | web in this type of overlay.
| | 04:37 | And the answer is no,
right now you cannot do that.
| | 04:40 | But that doesn't mean you can't
stream these media into a DPS Folio, you
| | 04:44 | just have to use a different approach and
use a web content overlay or an HTML article.
| | 04:49 | We'll see web content overlays
in another video in this series.
| | 04:53 | In this video, we saw how to place audio
and video content into a DPS Folio, and
| | 04:57 | how to use the Folio Overlays panel to
set options for how and when audio and
| | 05:01 | video play, as well as the size
and appearance of their controls.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating panoramas| 00:00 | Another type of overlay we
can create is a panorama.
| | 00:03 | The panorama gives you the feeling of
actually being in a particular location,
| | 00:07 | because you can see in all directions.
| | 00:09 | In some panoramas, you can look in any
direction, left or right, all the way
| | 00:12 | straight up to the sky or ceiling,
and all the way down to your feet.
| | 00:16 | So let's see how to create a panorama overlay.
| | 00:19 | Before you can do the work inside
InDesign you have to start by acquiring the
| | 00:23 | images to be used in the panorama
and that's much more work than actually
| | 00:26 | creating the panorama itself.
| | 00:29 | To create a seamless panorama, the DPS
tools need six images that fit together
| | 00:33 | like the insides of a cube.
| | 00:34 | I'll switchover to Preview and
I'll show you the set of images I have here.
| | 00:38 | I'll just go down through one by one
and you can see the four sides and the
| | 00:44 | top and the bottom.
| | 00:46 | You can use Photoshop to stitch
together images into a panorama and then use
| | 00:50 | an application like Pano2VR by Garden
Gnome software, to appropriately format
| | 00:55 | them for use with DPS.
| | 00:57 | Pano2VR isn't the only application that
can do this for you, but it is one that
| | 01:01 | Adobe mentions in their DPS documentation.
| | 01:04 | So with the six images in hand I can
setup the panorama overlay inside InDesign.
| | 01:09 | Panoramas are one of the types of overlays
that you began by creating with just a frame.
| | 01:13 | So I'll tap the F key on the keyboard
to give my Rectangle frame tool, and
| | 01:17 | I'll draw out a frame.
| | 01:18 | And with the empty, but still selected,
I'll go to my Folio Overlays panel
| | 01:23 | and click on Panorama, and at the top where it
says Load Images, I'll click on the folder icon.
| | 01:28 | Now I need to navigate to that
folder that contains those six images.
| | 01:31 | I'll go to Exercise Files > Links > Panorama.
| | 01:40 | Now it sized the poster a little bit
too big for me, so I'm going size that
| | 01:45 | down a little bit by holding Command
+Shift or Ctrl+Shift on the PC and
| | 01:48 | dragging one of the corners.
| | 01:51 | I'll re-center it on my page.
| | 01:54 | And now let's look at the
options for a panorama overlay.
| | 01:57 | First of all, I can Use the first image
for a poster if I want to, and that's the
| | 02:01 | initial view I'll have in the panorama.
| | 02:03 | So I'll keep that selected, I can set
the Initial Zoom value, which is the
| | 02:07 | magnification of the initial
image when the panorama is viewed.
| | 02:11 | The user can pinch to zoom in or
out on the panorama, and this is the
| | 02:15 | magnification they'll see before they pinch.
| | 02:17 | The maximum zoom value here is 100,
the Vertical and Horizontal values let me
| | 02:21 | choose which area of the
panorama is initially displayed.
| | 02:25 | The values here I enter are offsets in
terms of degrees from the first image.
| | 02:29 | So for Vertical I could set
a value between -90 and 90.
| | 02:33 | Negative 90 will make the initial view
tilted all the way up, 90 will make the
| | 02:37 | initial view tilted all the way down.
| | 02:39 | For Horizontal, I can set
values between -180 and 180;
| | 02:44 | negative values rotate the view
towards the left, positive values rotate
| | 02:47 | view towards the right.
| | 02:49 | If I go all the way in either direction
I'll be looking behind me, in the exact
| | 02:53 | opposite direction of the first image.
| | 02:55 | Field of View allows me to set limits on
how far in or out viewers can zoom when
| | 02:59 | they pinch the panoramas.
| | 03:01 | I can also set limits on how far I let
users pan vertically and horizontally.
| | 03:06 | For Vertical, I can enter values
between -90 and 90, for horizontal, I'd enter
| | 03:10 | values between -180 and 180.
| | 03:13 | The smaller the values,
the less panning I allow.
| | 03:16 | I can go al the way down to -1 and 1,
to allow no panning in either a vertical
| | 03:21 | or horizontal direction.
| | 03:23 | So let's preview our panorama.
| | 03:28 | Initially I see the poster, then I can
tap it to view the panorama and this is
| | 03:33 | the initial zoom percentage that I set.
| | 03:36 | With the Content Viewer Application I
can press the plus and minus keys on my
| | 03:39 | keyboard to simulate
pinching to zoom in and out.
| | 03:42 | So I can zoom farther in or pull back out.
| | 03:46 | I can click and drag to pan around, I
can look up and you can see a scene here,
| | 03:56 | I need to do a little bit more work in
Photoshop to make that sky be perfectly
| | 03:59 | seamless and I can look down.
| | 04:08 | Panoramas are a fun and engaging
element to add to a DPS Project. They are
| | 04:12 | simple to set up and manage in InDesign.
| | 04:15 | The challenge is to acquire the
images and set them up correctly before you
| | 04:18 | start working in InDesign.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding web content| 00:00 | You can add content from web sites
to the pages of your folios with the
| | 00:03 | web content overlay.
| | 00:05 | This way you can display web content without
the need for a separate browser. Let's see how!
| | 00:10 | With CS6, there are two ways
to create a web content overlay.
| | 00:13 | With the first way, we start with the frame.
| | 00:15 | The frame creates the viewing area
in which the web content will appear.
| | 00:19 | If I use an empty frame or a text frame,
there won't any poster which is the
| | 00:23 | static image that appears in
the folio before the web content.
| | 00:27 | If I use a frame containing a placed graphic
or just a fill color, those will be the poster.
| | 00:31 | So here I have a placed photo of the
Roux web site and I want it so when the user
| | 00:36 | taps this it's replaced with the
actual Roux web site in this area.
| | 00:39 | I'll select the placed photo and in
my Folio Overlays panel, I can see I've
| | 00:43 | entered the URL for the Roux Academy
right here, and I have some options;
| | 00:47 | I can set it to Auto Play, so the page
will load immediately as soon as this
| | 00:51 | page is viewed, or I can leave this off and
force the user to tap to view the web content.
| | 00:56 | If I select Auto Play, I can also
set the Delay, so it doesn't appear
| | 01:00 | immediately when the page loads.
| | 01:01 | I'll deselect that for now, so I want the
person to have to tap to see the web page here.
| | 01:05 | I can also select options
like Transparent Background.
| | 01:08 | If I select this option and the web
page I'm viewing has a transparent
| | 01:12 | background, then I can see through the
overlay to what's beneath it in my layout,
| | 01:16 | otherwise I'll see the web content background.
| | 01:18 | I can choose to Allow User Interaction
or not, and no user interaction really
| | 01:22 | means no interaction.
| | 01:23 | The user can't click links in the
page, they can't even scroll it.
| | 01:26 | They can only view the content.
| | 01:28 | And finally, I can set the web content
to scale to fit the container I drew or
| | 01:32 | to remain its original size.
| | 01:34 | If I don't scale the web content and
its larger than the frame I'm displaying
| | 01:37 | it in, the web content will appear cropped and
the user will be able to scroll to see everything.
| | 01:42 | So I'll leave this set on Scale Content to Fit.
| | 01:45 | Now I also want a Google Map to appear
over here in my design, and for that, I
| | 01:49 | can take advantage of a new feature in
CS6, where I can simply paste HTML code
| | 01:54 | into my layout and have the web
content overlay automatically created.
| | 01:58 | So I'll switch over to my web browser,
and here have the Roux Academy web site.
| | 02:02 | I'm going to scroll down and I have
the actual address here. I'll copy that.
| | 02:07 | I'll switch over to Google Maps and
paste it in, and press Return or Enter.
| | 02:12 | And what I want to do is to get
the code to paste into InDesign.
| | 02:16 | So I'll click on the link, and right here,
Paste HTML to embed in web site, I'll
| | 02:20 | just click once to select that and copy it.
| | 02:23 | I'll go back to InDesign and paste.
| | 02:26 | And InDesign goes ahead and creates a
little frame for me, and when it's done, I
| | 02:31 | can see that web content.
| | 02:33 | Now this is just a static picture, and
in fact, I can scale it down if I want to.
| | 02:39 | So I'll Command+Shift+Drag or Ctrl+
Shift+Drag on the PC to make that frame
| | 02:42 | smaller and fit in this area.
| | 02:45 | And if I look in the web content
overlay, I have some of the same options;
| | 02:49 | I can Auto Play, I can
choose the Transparent Background,
| | 02:51 | I'll Allow User Interaction and I'll
Scale the Content to Fit. Now let's preview.
| | 02:59 | Here are the posters, I can click on one,
and now here's the actual Roux Academy
| | 03:04 | web site where I can click and view the content.
| | 03:08 | I can click Done, go back to my
layout and I can click the Google Map, and
| | 03:16 | scroll around it, and use its controls.
| | 03:20 | And there's one more thing I want to show you
back in InDesign and that's that you
| | 03:24 | can take advantage of editing the HTML
code when you place it directly into InDesign.
| | 03:29 | I'll just right-click on the Google
Map and I'll select Edit HTML, and here's
| | 03:35 | that code that I copied and pasted from
the Google Maps web site, and if I wanted
| | 03:39 | to tweak any of that code,
I could do so right here.
| | 03:43 | Adding web content to your folios can
be a great way to enhance the overall
| | 03:46 | experience by bringing dynamic
content right onto the page, and you have
| | 03:50 | control over when that content appears,
how big it is, and whether users can
| | 03:54 | interact with it.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Panning and zooming| 00:00 | Did you ever see a compelling photo
in a print publication that you wished
| | 00:03 | you could see more of?
| | 00:04 | Maybe you wish you could see what was
just beyond the edge of the photo or maybe
| | 00:08 | you wished you could zoom in
to see the small details better.
| | 00:11 | Well you can do both of those
things with the Pan & Zoom overlay.
| | 00:15 | Here I have the page in my document
where I've placed a couple images of an art
| | 00:19 | gallery, and it's a large photo. I don't
want to fill the whole page, but I would
| | 00:21 | like people to be able to see the
detail of the photo and have the sort of fun
| | 00:25 | experience of exploring past the edges
of the photo and see what's beyond them.
| | 00:29 | So this is a perfect use for Pan & Zoom.
| | 00:31 | You can use PNG or JPEG files with Pan
& Zoom, but Adobe recommends JPEG, it's
| | 00:37 | also worth noting the Pan & Zoom is
not meant to work with images containing
| | 00:41 | transparency. Also a static image called
the poster is displayed before the user
| | 00:45 | taps it to start the Pan & Zoom.
| | 00:48 | If the image contains transparency,
what will happen is the poster will show
| | 00:51 | through the Pan & Zoom
image and it won't look good.
| | 00:54 | So here I have two different versions
of the art gallery photo. I'll click on the
| | 00:57 | one in the center and go to my Links
panel, and I'll look at the Link Info here.
| | 01:02 | So this is placed at 72 pixels
per inch and it's 1024x665.
| | 01:08 | The one on the left is the same image,
but it's at a higher size, 2000 pixels
| | 01:13 | by 1298 and it's scaled down to 50%, so its
effective resolution is 144 pixels per inch.
| | 01:20 | Let's go to the Folio Overlays panel
and there's only one simple control here
| | 01:25 | in Pan & Zoom and that's On and Off, so it's
turned on for both of these photos and let's preview.
| | 01:33 | So right now what we're seeing
is the poster, the static image.
| | 01:36 | If I tap it I start the Pan & Zoom overlay.
| | 01:40 | Now I can drag around and see
different parts of the photo.
| | 01:46 | So basically everything that was
cropped out of view in InDesign is now
| | 01:49 | available to me by dragging around.
| | 01:52 | With the Desktop Content Viewer
Application, I can use the plus and minus keys
| | 01:56 | on my keyboard to zoom in and out.
| | 01:58 | Now with this image in the center, I
can't zoom in anymore, because it's already
| | 02:01 | at the minimum resolution, which is 72
pixels per inch, but I can zoom out of it
| | 02:06 | by tapping the minus key and I
can still drag to pan around.
| | 02:13 | Now let's try the one on the left.
This was placed at 144 pixels per inch, so
| | 02:17 | I'll tap the poster, and again, I can
drag around and this time I can use the
| | 02:24 | plus key on my keyboard to zoom
in, and continue to pan around.
| | 02:34 | To reset the Pan & Zoom overlay, I can
double tap, and let's go back to InDesign
| | 02:40 | and we'll try one more option.
| | 02:42 | As I mention before the Pan & Zoom
overlay has something called the poster
| | 02:45 | which is the static image that's displayed
before someone taps the overlay to activate it.
| | 02:50 | If I do nothing else what we see here
we'll serve as the poster, but if I'd
| | 02:54 | rather have another image serve as the poster
I can just place it on top of the Pan & Zoom.
| | 02:59 | So in this case I have a close-up of
one of the paintings in the gallery that
| | 03:02 | I'd like to serve as the poster.
| | 03:03 | So all I have to do is drag it on top
and I'll just hold Option or Alt and I'll
| | 03:09 | drag again to cover this one,
and we'll preview again.
| | 03:16 | Now I see these posters and start the
Pan & Zoom, and double tap to reset.
| | 03:28 | Now you might be thinking it'll be cool
to have something like a nonrectangular
| | 03:31 | viewing area and I would agree,
but currently the view area must be a
| | 03:35 | rectangular frame for Pan & Zoom overlays.
| | 03:38 | Pan & Zoom overlays allow you to
take images that have been cropped in
| | 03:41 | InDesign and make the previously
hidden parts of the image visible to the
| | 03:45 | person viewing the folio.
| | 03:46 | Depending on the starting resolution
of your image, you can make the image
| | 03:49 | appear larger or smaller within the frame.
| | 03:52 | And finally, we saw how to cover Pan
& Zoom Overlay with a separate static
| | 03:55 | image that can serve as a poster when
we don't want to use the image itself for
| | 03:59 | that purpose.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating scrollable frames| 00:00 | Creating scrollable frames for content
in the DPS project is a great way to fit
| | 00:04 | more content into an area than you
normally could. It's also a great way to keep
| | 00:08 | pieces of content together.
| | 00:10 | For example, if you had a long column
of text and a particular image that you
| | 00:14 | want to be always visible while the
reader scrolled through the text, you could
| | 00:17 | make the image static and the
text frame scrollable. Let's see how.
| | 00:21 | Now there are different methods for
making scrollable content in a DPS folio and
| | 00:25 | one that works with images is the Pan
& Zoom overlay. It may not seem like a
| | 00:29 | scrollable frame since sometimes you
can zoom in different directions both
| | 00:33 | vertically and horizontally, but by the
way you crop the image you can constrain
| | 00:37 | that and make it into a scrollable frame.
| | 00:40 | So here I have a placed photo and
if I double-click on it, I can see the
| | 00:44 | content and I can see that there's no
more photo above or below the cropped
| | 00:48 | area, but there's plenty on
the left and the right-hand side.
| | 00:51 | Also if I go to the Links panel I can
see that this is currently at 72 pixels
| | 00:55 | per inch, so there won't be any
zooming on this photo, we'll just be able to
| | 00:59 | scroll. I'll double-click to select
the frame again, go to the Folio Overlays
| | 01:03 | panel and I can see the Pan & Zoom
is turned On. Let's preview and in the
| | 01:12 | Content Viewer I can click and I can't
drag up and down since there is no more
| | 01:16 | photo there, but I can drag left
and right and scroll the photo.
| | 01:24 | All right, let's go back to InDesign
and we'll go to the second page of the
| | 01:27 | document and here I want to make a
scrollable frame that contains the eight
| | 01:31 | reasons it's great to study at Roux Academy.
| | 01:34 | First I need to create a frame, so
I'll take my Rectangle Frame tool, click in
| | 01:38 | the document, and I'm going to create a
rectangle that's 470 pixels wide and 380
| | 01:43 | pixels tall, switch to my Selection
tool and I'll just position it, where I
| | 01:48 | want the scrollable frame to go,
right about there, and up in the Control
| | 01:53 | panel, I'll fill it with Paper.
| | 01:57 | Now this is going to be the visible
area for my list of eight reasons. I'll
| | 02:01 | switch over to another document, and
here I've set up the content that I want to
| | 02:05 | scroll, so for each reason I have two
text frames and an image, and you can see
| | 02:10 | that it's a very long and narrow document.
| | 02:12 | Let zoom in a little bit more, so
there are two text frames and an image for
| | 02:19 | each one of the eight reasons.
| | 02:24 | If I zoom out, down at the
bottom I've also placed a video.
| | 02:27 | You can place any other overly
content into a scrollable frame except for a
| | 02:31 | slideshow, because we're going to use
the Paste Into command to put the content
| | 02:35 | of this document into the container
frame, we have to setup separate frames as
| | 02:39 | anchor frames or just group everything
together, so it acts as one unit. In this
| | 02:43 | case, I grouped everything together.
I'll copy it, go back to my other document,
| | 02:50 | select the frame and choose Edit > Paste Into.
| | 02:54 | Now I'll use the control in the
control panel to select the content and I'm
| | 02:58 | going to adjust the offset.
| | 03:00 | I want this content to sit 30 pixels
over and 30 pixels down from the top left
| | 03:04 | corner of the frame.
| | 03:09 | Now I'll select the container frame
go to my Folio Overlays panel, select
| | 03:14 | Scrollable Frame and I
can pick a Scroll Direction.
| | 03:17 | In this case, I know I want Vertical, so
I'll pick that. I can choose whether to
| | 03:21 | Show/Hide Scroll Indicators, so I'll
leave Hide unchecked. So I will see a
| | 03:25 | scroll indicator on the right-hand
side here. I can also set the initial
| | 03:29 | position for the content, either at
the upper-left corner or I can use where
| | 03:32 | it is in the document.
| | 03:34 | So if I'd left this centered in that
frame, I could use that position or I could
| | 03:38 | force everything to the top left.
| | 03:40 | Right now I'm going to say Use Document
Position, because I carefully selected
| | 03:43 | this to be 30 pixels over and 30 pixels
down, and just for fun, let's add a little
| | 03:48 | special effect. So with the frame
selected, I'll go to the FX icon in the Control
| | 03:52 | panel, I'll choose Inner Shadow, I'll
turn on Preview, so I can see it, and it
| | 03:58 | gives me a little feeling of depth in
here. It's a little too dark though, so
| | 04:01 | let's reduce the opacity down to say 25%.
| | 04:06 | Okay, let's preview, and I can click on
my scrollable frame and see the 8 reasons
| | 04:16 | it's great to study at the Roux Academy.
| | 04:21 | Down at the bottom is my
video and I can tap to play it.
| | 04:27 | (video playing)
| | 04:34 | So the key to making scrollable frames
is the Paste Into command, which lets you
| | 04:38 | paste text, images, and other interactive
content, or a combination of all of those
| | 04:43 | things into a container frame.
| | 04:45 | In order to use Paste Into, you have
to anchor multiple frames or group them
| | 04:49 | like I did here, before pasting them
into the container, and then you choose the
| | 04:52 | scrolling direction.
| | 04:54 | And remember to use the offsets to arrange
the content as you want it to be seen.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. Digital Publishing Suite (DPS), Part 2Using the Folio Builder panel| 00:00 | A folio is the basic unit of
production in the DPS workflow.
| | 00:04 | So let's see how to create and work with
folios in the Folio Builder panel in InDesign.
| | 00:09 | First off, folios are
composed of one or more articles.
| | 00:13 | Each folio you produce becomes an
issue in the library of either the generic
| | 00:17 | Adobe Content Viewer or a
custom multi-issue viewer.
| | 00:21 | If you create a custom single issue
viewer, the folio includes all the
| | 00:24 | contents of that viewer app.
| | 00:27 | In InDesign, you use the Folio Builder
panel to create folios and articles. You
| | 00:31 | can open the Folio Builder panel
by choosing Window > Folio Builder.
| | 00:36 | You don't have to have any InDesign
documents open to see the folios you've created.
| | 00:41 | The Folio Builder panel includes three views,
the Folio View, Article View and Layout View.
| | 00:46 | And until you get oriented it can be a
little confusing about what's being displayed.
| | 00:50 | Right now in my folio panel I can see at
the top that I'm in Folio View and that
| | 00:55 | all these folios are Local. They
haven't been uploaded to my account.
| | 00:58 | If I were signed into my account @acrobat.com,
I would get a pop-up menu here or
| | 01:03 | I could choose to view just my Local
folios, just ones in the cloud, private
| | 01:07 | folios, shared folios or all folios.
| | 01:11 | On the right I have a menu where I can
sort my folios, according to when they
| | 01:15 | were updated, alphabetically, by
publication date, and I can reverse the listing.
| | 01:19 | The circle on the far right indicates my
status, as to whether I am signed into my account.
| | 01:24 | In the Panel menu I can create a new
folio, sign in to my account, sign up for
| | 01:29 | an account, open the DPS web site, go
to the DPS Help page and check which
| | 01:33 | version of the DPS tools I'm using.
| | 01:35 | Let's check which version
of the tools we are using.
| | 01:39 | These tools are updated quite
frequently and the way you can tell exactly which
| | 01:42 | version or drop of these tools you
have is by the numbers after last period.
| | 01:48 | So in this case I'm using drop 20.
| | 01:51 | In the main part of the panel, I am now
looking at my folios. If I hover over
| | 01:55 | one, I get a tooltip displaying
some information about the folio.
| | 01:58 | If I click on the folio, it's highlighted.
| | 02:01 | Now in the Panel menu I have more options.
| | 02:04 | So for example, I can rename the folio,
I can delete the folio, I can check its
| | 02:08 | properties, and so on.
| | 02:10 | Let's look at the Properties.
| | 02:12 | Publication Name is the name that
will appear in the viewer application.
| | 02:16 | If I'm just working with a Local
folio, I don't need to give it a name.
| | 02:20 | It's important that you don't use any
special characters in the publication name
| | 02:23 | to avoid any problems, so
just stick to numbers and spaces.
| | 02:27 | Selecting Right Edge Binding will
create a folio that displays articles from
| | 02:30 | right to left, rather than
left to right in the viewer.
| | 02:34 | I can assign separate Cover
Previews for both the horizontal and
| | 02:36 | vertical orientations.
| | 02:38 | Cover images should be 72 pixels per
inch, JPEG or PNG files, with the same pixel
| | 02:43 | dimensions as the device you are targeting.
| | 02:46 | So for an iPad you could create a
cover preview that was 1024x768.
| | 02:51 | For now, I'll just cancel out and we
can continue our tour of the panel.
| | 02:55 | To view the articles within a folio, I
can either click on the small triangle on
| | 02:59 | the right-hand side or I can double-
click anywhere within the folio listing.
| | 03:02 | Now I am at the Articles view, where I
can see all the articles in the folio
| | 03:07 | that I double-clicked.
| | 03:08 | And I can click and drag to
rearrange articles if I want to.
| | 03:12 | In the Articles view, I can go
to the Panel menu and I can import
| | 03:16 | additional articles.
| | 03:18 | I can import a Single
Article or Multiple Articles.
| | 03:24 | With an article selected, I can update
it, I can rename it, I can delete it, or
| | 03:29 | relink it to a different InDesign file.
| | 03:31 | I can also set properties for the article.
| | 03:36 | The Title is what will
appear as a title in the viewer.
| | 03:39 | The title is different from the article
name that you see in the Folio Builder.
| | 03:43 | The Article Name is what's used
to create links between articles.
| | 03:46 | I can set a Description to appear
when the folio is viewed in browse mode.
| | 03:51 | Down below for the Table of
Contents Preview, I can have a thumbnail
| | 03:54 | automatically generated or I can replace
that with a custom icon that I specify here.
| | 03:58 | The file would need to be
a 70x70 pixel PNG file.
| | 04:02 | For articles that are made up of just one page,
| | 04:04 | I can select Smooth Scrolling and I can
select it in Horizontal Only, Vertical
| | 04:09 | Only or in Both Directions.
| | 04:11 | If I don't select Smooth Scrolling,
then scrolling will snap to each page.
| | 04:16 | I can select Horizontal Swipe Only to
allow users to move through an article by
| | 04:20 | swiping left and right, instead of up and down.
| | 04:23 | Byline would typically be the author's name;
| | 04:26 | Kicker would be the section
title of the overall publication.
| | 04:30 | You can also tag an article as an
advertisement to prevent it from appearing in
| | 04:33 | the viewer Table of Contents.
| | 04:36 | Folios are made up of articles
and articles are made up of layouts.
| | 04:39 | So when I am at the Articles view, I
can see its layouts either by clicking the
| | 04:44 | small triangle on the right or
double-clicking the Article Name.
| | 04:46 | Now I am at the Article view. If I hover
over an article, I can see its location
| | 04:51 | on disk and to open a layout,
I could double-click on it.
| | 04:55 | So in the Folio Builder panel, double-
clicking always drills down, from folio to
| | 04:59 | article and from article to layout.
| | 05:01 | To go back up one level from the Layout
view to the Article view, I can click on
| | 05:05 | the folio name, now I am back up at the
Articles level, and then to go up to the
| | 05:10 | Folio View I can click on the
little triangle on the left.
| | 05:12 | Now I am at the Folio View.
| | 05:15 | At the bottom of the panel, I have
buttons to preview the folio, create a new one
| | 05:18 | or to delete a selected folio.
| | 05:21 | So that's an overview of
the Folio Builder panel.
| | 05:24 | Next, we will create a new
folio and set up its properties.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a folio| 00:00 | After you've created your InDesign
layout and added interactivity with folio
| | 00:04 | overlays, the next step in the DPS
project is to create the folio itself.
| | 00:09 | In this movie, I want to create the
folio for the Roux Academy that will include
| | 00:12 | the course catalog and the
reasons why it's great to study at Roux.
| | 00:16 | A folio is what will appear as a whole
publication or as an issue in the Library
| | 00:20 | view of the Adobe Content Viewer
or a multi-issue custom viewer.
| | 00:25 | To create a folio you work in the
Folio Builder panel which you can open by
| | 00:28 | choosing Window > Folio Builder.
| | 00:31 | I have it open here and the first
thing I'm going to do in the panel is to
| | 00:35 | sign into my account.
| | 00:36 | I'll go to the Panel menu and
choose Sign In, or I can just click here.
| | 00:40 | I'll enter my credentials and click Sign In.
| | 00:47 | Now I can see from the filled in
circle icon on the right that I'm signed in.
| | 00:51 | You don't have to be signed into your
account to create a folio, you can create
| | 00:54 | a local folio on your
machine and upload it later.
| | 00:57 | So create a new folio, I'll click
New and I'll name it Roux Academy.
| | 01:06 | The name of the folio does not have
to be the same as the publication name
| | 01:10 | that's shown in the Content Viewer.
| | 01:12 | Next, pick a size that matches the
dimensions of the device I'm publishing to.
| | 01:16 | I'm going to publish this folio to the
iPad, so I'll have the size be 1024x768,
| | 01:22 | but I could pick from different screen
sizes in the menu, or I could specify a
| | 01:27 | specific Width and Height.
| | 01:29 | I can also set the Orientation to be
Portrait Only, Landscape Only or both.
| | 01:34 | Next I have the option to create a local
folio or to have it immediately uploaded.
| | 01:38 | For now, I'm going to create a
local folio that I can upload later.
| | 01:42 | Next I have to pick a default
image format for the folio.
| | 01:45 | In a folio there are two layers:
| | 01:47 | the background image, and the overlays,
which sit on top of the background image
| | 01:51 | and contain all the interactivity.
| | 01:53 | Everything in my InDesign documents
that's not part of an overlay will be
| | 01:56 | rendered as an image and this is where I
choose the default format for those images.
| | 02:01 | Individual articles can have
different image format settings. Here I can
| | 02:05 | choose Automatic to let InDesign
determine whether it exports my pages as
| | 02:08 | JPEGs, PNGs or PDF.
| | 02:11 | Any of the three choices can
give me good image quality,
| | 02:14 | but if I'm concerned about file size,
there's a clear choice and that's PDF.
| | 02:18 | It'll make smaller folios in terms of
file size than either PNG or JPEG, and
| | 02:22 | choosing PDF also lets
users pinch to zoom in and out.
| | 02:26 | However, PDF does have some limitations.
| | 02:29 | First, only viewers in Apple's iOS
support the PDF format. You can't preview PDF
| | 02:34 | articles in the Desktop
Viewer or in Android devices.
| | 02:37 | You also can't use PDF for
smooth scrolling articles.
| | 02:41 | If you import smooth scrolling
articles into a PDF folio, those articles are
| | 02:45 | converted to JPEG or PNG.
| | 02:48 | However, PDF is still recommended
format especially if you're targeting the
| | 02:51 | iPad with retina display just because
the big reduction in file size from a
| | 02:55 | JPEG or a PNG folio.
| | 02:57 | If I chose Automatic or JPEG I
can also pick a JPEG Quality.
| | 03:03 | Naturally as the quality the JPEG
images increases so does the file size.
| | 03:08 | In this case, I'm going to select PDF
for my folio, which grays out the default
| | 03:11 | JPEG choice, and click OK.
| | 03:14 | And when I click OK the Folio Builder
panel switches so I'm looking at my new
| | 03:18 | folio in the articles view,
so Roux Academy > Articles.
| | 03:22 | Now I have a Local Folio, and if I
switch to the Folio View in the panel, I can
| | 03:26 | see the disk icon which indicates
this is a local folio, right there.
| | 03:32 | I also need to set my Folio's properties
which will include things that identify
| | 03:35 | this folio in the Content Viewer
library like a publication name and preview
| | 03:39 | images of the cover.
| | 03:40 | I need to supply those preview images
because they aren't created automatically.
| | 03:45 | So before I go to set my properties I
want to export images of the pages I'm
| | 03:49 | going to use for those cover previews.
| | 03:51 | If I look in my Pages panel I can
see I have two versions of this layout;
| | 03:55 | iPad Horizontal and iPad Vertical.
| | 03:58 | I'll press Command+E or Ctrl+E to
bring up the Export dialog box and I'll
| | 04:02 | choose Format > PNG.
| | 04:03 | I could also choose JPEG if I wanted
to for the cover previews, and I'll
| | 04:07 | export to the Desktop.
| | 04:09 | I'll name the first one, RouxCatalog_
cover_H, and I'll select to export a range.
| | 04:18 | In the pop-up on the right, I can pick
from my alternate layouts, so I'll pick
| | 04:21 | my horizontal layout, and to just export the
single first page of the layout I'll enter a :1.
| | 04:29 | So the first page of the horizontal layout.
| | 04:31 | I'll leave the rest of the
options as they are and click Export.
| | 04:34 | Then I'll repeat the process to create
the cover preview for the vertical layout.
| | 04:38 | Export, change the file name to
RouxCatalog_cover_V, click Save,
| | 04:45 | choose my vertical layout, :1
for the first page and click Export.
| | 04:51 | Now I can go back to the Folio Builder panel
and from the Panel menu I'll choose Properties.
| | 04:56 | I'll give this a Publication Name of
Roux Catalog and I'll select the images I
| | 05:03 | just exported for the cover previews.
| | 05:05 | So I'll click on the folder, go to my
Desktop and start with the vertical and
| | 05:12 | repeat for the horizontal, and click OK.
| | 05:17 | Now I have my folio created and set with
the properties that I want, but at this
| | 05:21 | point the folio is just an
empty shell. It has no content yet.
| | 05:24 | The next step is to add that
content in the form of articles.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding articles to a folio| 00:00 | In DPS, a folio corresponds to an
individual publication like the issue of a
| | 00:04 | magazine, but a magazine without
articles would be just about empty.
| | 00:08 | Likewise in order for your folio to have
content you have to add articles to the folio.
| | 00:12 | So let's see how.
| | 00:13 | There are two sources for articles in
DPS, InDesign documents and HTML files.
| | 00:19 | And there are two methods
for adding articles to a folio.
| | 00:22 | You can create an article based on an
open InDesign document or you can import
| | 00:26 | documents from a folder.
| | 00:27 | Here we are going to add two articles
to a folio from open InDesign documents.
| | 00:31 | Articles can include one layout or
two layouts for portrait and landscape
| | 00:35 | orientation, but you can't mix and
match within a folio and have some articles
| | 00:39 | horizontal and other's vertical.
| | 00:41 | All articles in a folio must be portrait
only, landscape only, or dual-orientation.
| | 00:46 | And that's what I have here, both of my
InDesign files have both horizontal and
| | 00:50 | vertical versions of the layout
that I can see in the Pages panel.
| | 00:54 | So let's go to the Folio Builder
panel and I'll quickly build a new folio.
| | 00:58 | I will call it Roux Academy.
| | 01:02 | I will leave the size 1024x768,
dual-orientation.
| | 01:07 | I will create a local folio and I can
upload it later, and I will leave the
| | 01:12 | Default Format at
Automatic and JPEG Quality is High.
| | 01:16 | Now I am at the Articles level and
I can click Add to add the current
| | 01:19 | document to my folio.
| | 01:21 | I will call the new article Catalog
and I will leave all the rest of the
| | 01:27 | default as they are.
| | 01:28 | Now that the Catalog article has been
added to the folio, let's add another.
| | 01:33 | I will switch to my other document,
click Add, and this one I will call
| | 01:38 | Reasons and click OK.
| | 01:44 | Once the articles have been added, I can
click on them and I can view the layouts.
| | 01:49 | So here's my landscape and
here's the portrait version.
| | 01:51 | I will click the triangle to go up to
the Folio view and I will click Preview.
| | 02:00 | Here is my first article, the catalog.
| | 02:03 | I can scroll through it and I
actually created a link between this article
| | 02:08 | and the other article.
| | 02:09 | I can click on to go to the Reasons article.
| | 02:12 | I can click and view my scrollable
content here and I also have a link back to
| | 02:18 | the original article.
| | 02:19 | In the Content Viewer application I can
also change the view, so I can switch to
| | 02:24 | the portrait orientation and
see how my layout looks there.
| | 02:33 | Let's switch back to InDesign and I
mentioned earlier there are other ways of
| | 02:37 | adding articles besides creating them
from currently opened InDesign documents.
| | 02:41 | One way is to import
articles in the Folio Builder panel.
| | 02:44 | So when I am at the Articles level, right here,
I can go to the Panel menu and choose Import.
| | 02:52 | In the dialog box I can either choose to
import a single article or multiple articles.
| | 02:57 | And I have the same options as they
did in the New Article dialog box with
| | 03:01 | one exception, down at the bottom I can
specify a location to import the article from.
| | 03:05 | Now if I want to import multiple
articles at once I can make that selection and
| | 03:09 | then I just specify the location.
| | 03:12 | However, in order for this to work I
would first have to make sure that I had my
| | 03:16 | files named in a specific manner and
located in a specific folder structure.
| | 03:20 | Let's switch over to the Finder and
take a look at that folder structure.
| | 03:23 | So at the top-level, everything is contained
in a folder that corresponds to the folio.
| | 03:28 | Inside that are subfolders for each
article and if you're creating a single
| | 03:32 | orientation, just horizontal or vertical,
the article folders can contain only
| | 03:36 | one InDesign file with _h or _v
suffix at the end of the file name.
| | 03:43 | If you're creating dual-orientation
folios each article must contain two
| | 03:47 | InDesign documents, one
with an _h and one with an _v.
| | 03:52 | If you want to create a PNG file for
the table of contents thumbnail that can
| | 03:56 | also be in the article folder.
| | 03:58 | The last option for importing an
article into a folio is to not use InDesign as
| | 04:02 | your source file at all, but
instead to specify HTML content.
| | 04:06 | What you'd need in that case is a
folder with your HTML assets. Switch back to
| | 04:11 | InDesign, and at the Articles view of the
Folio Builder panel, you go to the Panel
| | 04:16 | menu and choose Import.
| | 04:19 | In the dialog box choose Import a
Single Article and set the options as you
| | 04:23 | would for other articles,
| | 04:24 | and choose the location that is the folder
containing your HTML assets, including an
| | 04:29 | HTML file, an images folder, and
CSS for formatting the content.
| | 04:34 | There are naming requirements to for
HTML articles similar to what we saw for
| | 04:38 | InDesign-based articles.
| | 04:40 | You can use a single HTML file for both
portrait and landscape orientations, or
| | 04:44 | you can use separate files
for the two orientations.
| | 04:47 | If you're using separate HTML files you
add the _v and _h suffixes at the end of
| | 04:53 | the HTML file names.
| | 04:55 | If you're adding an HTML article to a
single-orientation folio, you need only one
| | 04:59 | HTML file with the _h or _v suffix.
| | 05:04 | One other thing to note at this
point about HTML articles and that's an
| | 05:07 | alternative to having all the
assets for each HTML file in a folder.
| | 05:11 | There is also another option which is
to put all the assets like images and
| | 05:14 | scripts for the whole folio into one
HTML resources folder which you can then
| | 05:19 | import into the folio from
the Folio Builder Panel menu.
| | 05:22 | That's this choice right here.
| | 05:24 | The file you import here must be a
compressed ZIP archive with the exact name
| | 05:29 | HTMLResources.zip with no spaces.
| | 05:33 | In this movie we saw how to add content
to our folios from InDesign files either
| | 05:37 | by adding the current document or by
importing InDesign documents or HTML files
| | 05:42 | that are located and named in a
way that the DPS tools understand.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Content Viewer to preview a folio| 00:00 | You wouldn't print a book or launch a
web site without proofing and testing them
| | 00:04 | first to make sure that
everything came out the way you wanted.
| | 00:07 | The same goes for DPS projects.
| | 00:09 | After you build folios and articles,
it's important that you preview them.
| | 00:13 | You can quickly get a sense of the
look and feel of your publication by
| | 00:16 | previewing it in the Content Viewer application.
| | 00:19 | The Adobe Content Viewer is a
separate application from InDesign.
| | 00:22 | It comes in both mobile and desktop versions.
| | 00:25 | The desktop version of the content
viewer is an AIR application that's
| | 00:28 | automatically installed when you
install the Folio Producer tools.
| | 00:32 | If you want to preview your folios
on your mobile device then you can
| | 00:35 | download the mobile version of the
Content Viewer for free from the app
| | 00:38 | stores for your device.
| | 00:41 | In order to preview a folio with the
desktop viewer the articles in the folio
| | 00:44 | must all have the same
aspect ratio and orientation.
| | 00:47 | So you won't be able to preview a folio
that has both a horizontal only article
| | 00:52 | and a dual-orientation article.
| | 00:54 | In this situation you could just
preview the articles individually, but you
| | 00:58 | couldn't preview any links between articles.
| | 01:00 | Another limitation of the desktop
viewer is that it doesn't support articles
| | 01:04 | that use the PDF image format, but even
with those limitations it's very useful
| | 01:08 | to preview articles and
folios in the desktop viewer.
| | 01:11 | To do this I'm going to go into my
Folio Builder panel and what I preview
| | 01:15 | depends on what I have selected in the panel.
| | 01:17 | If I select a folio, I'll preview the folio.
| | 01:20 | If I select an article I'll preview the article.
| | 01:23 | Here I'd like to preview the whole folio.
| | 01:25 | So I'll go up a level to the folio level.
| | 01:28 | Now I'll click Preview > Preview on Desktop.
| | 01:32 | This launches the Content Viewer
application where I can see my folio, I
| | 01:36 | can swipe through the pages, I can
view it at different sizes, so I can fit
| | 01:44 | it inside my screen.
| | 01:46 | I can test buttons and links, swipe in-
between the articles, and I can navigate.
| | 01:51 | Here I can see the title and
the byline and the description.
| | 01:57 | I can swipe in between and
click to navigate to an article.
| | 02:01 | There is really a plenty of different
ways to navigate and see your content,
| | 02:07 | and since this was a dual-orientation folio, I
can view it in either portrait or landscape.
| | 02:17 | Let's close the Content Viewer and go
back to InDesign and look at some other
| | 02:21 | ways we can preview.
| | 02:22 | One is through the File menu where I
can just choose File > Folio Preview to
| | 02:27 | preview the current
document in the Content Viewer.
| | 02:33 | I can still view the different
orientations, but I can't go to different
| | 02:37 | articles since I just
previewed this one article.
| | 02:42 | Also, if I go back to that menu I can
see right under Folio Preview I have
| | 02:46 | Folio Preview Settings.
| | 02:47 | These are going to control what I
see when I choose Folio Preview.
| | 02:50 | So let's take a quick look at those;
and I can choose a format, JPEG, PNG, or
| | 02:56 | Auto, and if I choose Auto or JPEG I
can choose a quality and I can choose to
| | 03:01 | preview just the current layout
or all layouts in the document.
| | 03:06 | Another way to preview DPS content
is through the Folio Overlays panel.
| | 03:10 | So if I select my scrollable frame
here and go to the Folio Overlays panel, I
| | 03:15 | can see that there's a Preview button
down in the bottom left. I can click that
| | 03:19 | and I can preview the current
document regardless of whether or not it's
| | 03:25 | included in the folio.
| | 03:27 | The entire document is exported and
previewed in the desktop viewer, and again
| | 03:31 | since I'm just previewing one document
I won't have access to other articles in
| | 03:35 | a folio since those would have
to come from other documents.
| | 03:39 | The only way to preview an entire folio
in the desktop Content Viewer is through
| | 03:42 | the Folio Builder panel.
| | 03:44 | Now that we've made our folio and
previewed it locally it's time to take the
| | 03:47 | next step towards publishing it to
tablet devices and that is to use the
| | 03:51 | Folio Producer tools.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Folio Producer| 00:00 | In previous movies we've seen how to
create interactive overlays, create
| | 00:04 | folios, and add articles to them and
to preview them on the desktop with a
| | 00:08 | Content Viewer application.
| | 00:10 | The next step is to upload a folio and use
the Folio Producer tools to publish the folio.
| | 00:15 | In a Folio Builder panel I have my Roux
Academy folio and it has two articles in
| | 00:20 | it, Catalogs and Reasons,
| | 00:23 | and so far I have done all the
work locally on this folio.
| | 00:26 | I can see right now that I am
just looking at local folios.
| | 00:29 | So this folio doesn't exist
anywhere but on my computer.
| | 00:32 | Now what I want to do is upload it using
the Folio Producer tools so I can publish it.
| | 00:37 | The first thing I need to do
is to sign into my account.
| | 00:40 | So I can go to the Panel menu and
choose Sign In and I can sign into Digital
| | 00:45 | Publishing Suite using my Adobe ID.
| | 00:52 | Now that I am signed in I can tell that
this is still a local folio by the disk
| | 00:56 | icon on the right-hand side.
| | 00:58 | And I can tell that I'm signed in
because this circle is filled in.
| | 01:01 | Then I can click on the folio to
select it and from the Panel menu choose
| | 01:05 | Upload to Folio Producer.
| | 01:08 | My folio is now being uploaded and this can
take some time depending on the size of the folio.
| | 01:15 | When the upload is complete I can click OK,
and now you see that disk icon is gone here.
| | 01:20 | So this is no longer a local folio.
| | 01:22 | Then from the Panel menu
let's choose Folio Producer.
| | 01:26 | This takes me to my web browser and to
the DPS homepage, and I arrived at the
| | 01:30 | Organizer View and I can see my
folio with the publication name.
| | 01:35 | It doesn't have a folio number yet and
it doesn't have a Product ID yet, but
| | 01:39 | I can see the publication date and I can see
the folio details over on the right-hand side.
| | 01:44 | So I can see my vertical and
horizontal cover previews and a description.
| | 01:47 | I will enter that in here.
| | 01:56 | I can open the folio and that takes me
to the Editor View where I can see the
| | 02:02 | articles, and if I hover over an article
I can see its properties, and I can click
| | 02:07 | on an article to edit those properties.
| | 02:09 | So I will change this to
Reasons to Study at Roux.
| | 02:16 | I can also see my articles in List view,
I can add extra articles, and I can
| | 02:21 | also import HTML resources.
| | 02:23 | When I'm done, I can close the editor
and go back to the Organizer view where I
| | 02:28 | can do things like share the folio.
| | 02:31 | So I can type in the email address
of someone I want to share it with.
| | 02:38 | And I could enter a message if
I want to and then click Share.
| | 02:43 | Okay, we are almost ready to publish this folio.
| | 02:45 | The next thing we have to do is make
sure we filled in all the required fields.
| | 02:49 | These are indicated by the asterisks.
| | 02:51 | So my Folio Name is set, the
Publication Name is set, but I don't have a Folio
| | 02:57 | Number and I also have to have a
cover preview and a description.
| | 03:00 | So I am going to click on Folio Number and
for this purpose I can just enter in any number.
| | 03:05 | So I will just put 123 and then click Publish.
| | 03:10 | In the Publish Folio dialog box, first you
can set the status as Private or Public.
| | 03:15 | Public means that people can download
the folio from the app store and you need
| | 03:19 | to have a DPS subscription
to publish a public folio.
| | 03:22 | Private means the folio will only be
available in the Content Viewer app when
| | 03:26 | I'm logged in with my Adobe ID.
| | 03:28 | The next choice is Free or Retail.
| | 03:30 | Free is my only choice here, because
I'm not logged in with an account that
| | 03:33 | would allow me to choose Retail.
| | 03:35 | If I had an Enterprise or Professional
Edition account, or had purchased a single
| | 03:39 | edition I could choose Retail.
| | 03:41 | The last is Product ID and see the
asterisk that means it's required.
| | 03:46 | Again, if were working with a subscription account,
I would need to use an organized
| | 03:49 | naming convention for the Product ID.
| | 03:52 | Adobe recommends this convention.
| | 04:00 | In this case I'll modify it;
| | 04:02 | I will just change it to roux.
catalog.one and click Publish.
| | 04:13 | All right, I have successfully started
the process of publishing the folio and I
| | 04:17 | can go to Publish Request to track that.
| | 04:18 | I will click OK and under View I will choose
Publish Requests and I can track my progress.
| | 04:28 | All right, now the status is completed.
| | 04:29 | I can go back to the View menu and
choose All Folios, and I see for this
| | 04:34 | particular folio, it's been published.
| | 04:37 | Over on the right in the Folio
Details if I wanted to I could unpublish it,
| | 04:41 | export the folio, or I could make changes
to the Folio Details and then update it.
| | 04:46 | Now that the folio is published I can
go to my mobile device, open the Content
| | 04:50 | Viewer app, sign in, and then
download this published folio.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Viewing a folio on an iPad| 00:01 | The final step in our interactive
documents workflow is to use the Content
| | 00:05 | Viewer app on a mobile device to
download a published document and view it.
| | 00:09 | So let's do that on an iPad.
| | 00:11 | Here on my iPad I've installed the
Adobe Viewer app which you can download for
| | 00:15 | free from the App Store.
| | 00:17 | I'll tap to open it and I come to the
Library View where I can see my documents
| | 00:22 | that I've previously downloaded.
| | 00:23 | In order to download a published
document I need to sign in with my Adobe ID.
| | 00:28 | Once I'm signed in I can see all
the issues that are available to me.
| | 00:32 | Here is the Roux catalog and I can view it.
| | 00:35 | The catalog opens and we have all the
same controls for navigating and viewing
| | 00:39 | the content that we did in
the desktop viewer application.
| | 00:42 | I can swipe to scroll through
different pages, I can tap buttons to navigate
| | 00:47 | to different articles, and I can use
overlays like this frame that contains
| | 00:51 | scrollable content.
| | 00:53 | I'll go back to my other article and
scroll to the last page where I have
| | 00:59 | web content overlays.
| | 01:01 | I can tap it to show the Roux Academy
web site, open and close the pages, and I
| | 01:10 | can use the Google Map.
| | 01:14 | I can tap to reveal my navigation
controls and navigate my different articles.
| | 01:20 | At the bottom I can use the scrub bar
to go from one article to another and I
| | 01:25 | can tap the button at the top right to
scroll through my articles and see the
| | 01:28 | properties that I set.
| | 01:30 | The title is what's in white, the
description is over the article and the
| | 01:37 | byline is under the title.
| | 01:39 | So there you have it.
| | 01:40 | We took some InDesign documents, added
interactive overlays, and published them
| | 01:45 | in a folio to the iPad.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
ConclusionNext steps| 00:00 | Congratulations on completing
InDesign CS6 Interactive Documents!
| | 00:04 | I hope these movies gave you a
clear understanding of what kinds of
| | 00:07 | interactivity you can build with InDesign.
| | 00:09 | I also hope you'll be inspired to
experiment with these tools to create new and
| | 00:13 | interesting kinds of interactive
features, things that make your documents and
| | 00:16 | presentations more
engaging and effective than ever.
| | 00:20 | If you want to know more about
InDesign CS6, I recommend you watch David
| | 00:23 | Blatner's InDesign CS6 Essential
Training, and Anne- Marie Concepcion's
| | 00:28 | InDesign CS6 New Features.
| | 00:30 | If you want to know more about
working with interactive PDFs checkout
| | 00:34 | Anne-Marie's Acrobat X Tips and Tricks
and for more information on eBooks for
| | 00:38 | the iPad and Kindle, check out her
Creating a Fixed-Layout EPUB, InDesign CS5.5
| | 00:43 | to EPUB, Kindle and iPad.
| | 00:46 | I'm Mike Rankin and thanks for watching!
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
